Fiat Tipo 5Door 2017 User Manual

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FCA Italy S.p.A. reserves the right to modify

the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.

Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.

OWNER HANDBOOK

TIPO 5DOOR

TIPO STATION WAGON

ENGLISH

COP TIPO 5 DOORS UM SW GB.qxp_500 UM ITA 31/05/16 17:11 Pagina 1

This Owner Handbook is intended to show the vehicle's operating conditions.

For the enthusiast user who wants to have insights, curiosities and detailed information about the characteristics and functions

of the vehicle, Fiat gives the opportunity to consult a dedicated section which is available in electronic format.

ONLINE VEHICLE OWNER HANDBOOK

The following symbol is reported within the text of the Owner Handbook, next to the subjects for which details are provided.

Go to the www.mopar.eu/owner

website and access your personal area.

The “Maintenance and care” page includes all the information about your vehicle and the link to access eLUM, where you will find

all the details of the Owner Handbook.

Alternatively, to access this information, go to the Internet website at http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/

The eLUM website is free and will allow you, among many other things, to easily consult the on-board documents

of all the other vehicles of the Group.

Have a nice reading and happy motoring!

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail.

At Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,

offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.

Fiat workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks

and practical recommendations by our experts.

With Original Parts distributed by MOPAR

, you maintain the reliability, comfort

and performance features that you bought your new car for over time.

Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because

they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.

For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed

by FCA for your car.

SAFETY:

BRAKING SYSTEM

ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,

CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE

COMFORT: SUSPENSION

AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS

PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS,

INJECTORS AND BATTERIES

LINEACCESSORI

ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS

WHY CHOOSING

GENUINE PARTS

COP TIPO 5 DOORS UM SW GB.qxp_500 UM ITA 31/05/16 17:11 Pagina 2

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.

Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best

performance from its technical features.

You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and

above all with those concerning brakes, steering and gearbox; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behaviour on

different road surfaces.

This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care

and maintenance of your vehicle over time.

After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains

on board the vehicle should it be sold.

In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Fiat offers to its customers, the Warranty

Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity.

We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the

people at Fiat.

Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all vehicle versions. Options, equipment dedicated to specific markets or

versions are not explicitly indicated in the text: as a consequence, you should only consider the information which

is related to the trim level, engine and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the

production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the

wording (where provided).

All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA Italy

S.p.A. aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason it reserves the right to make

changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.

For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership.

READ THIS CAREFULLY

REFUELLING

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 in compliance with the European specification

EN228.

For further details on the use of the correct fuel see the "Refuelling the vehicle" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter.

Diesel engines: refuel only with Diesel fuel motor vehicles conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or

mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused.

For further details on the use of the correct fuel see the "Refuelling the vehicle" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Versions with manual gearbox (petrol engines): make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral, fully depress the

clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release the key as soon as the engine has started.

Versions with manual gearbox (Diesel engines): make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral, fully depress the

clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the

warning light to switch off. Turn the

ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the car on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable

material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the

environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact a Fiat Dealership.

They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness

and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS

…important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of the car over time. Special attention must be

paid to the symbols

(personal safety) (environmental protection) (car integrity).

USE OF THE OWNER HANDBOOK

Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be understood as

regarding an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be specified as appropriate in the text.

The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do

not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles

with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or

construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure.

To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key

for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is in any case a textual indication of the

current chapter at the side of each even page.

WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS

While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your

vehicle.

There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle,

which could cause accidents or injuries.

Therefore all WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS must always be carefully followed.

WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols:

personal safety;

vehicle safety;

environmental protection.

NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number.

That number recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant section.

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS

IMPORTANT Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents,

in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.

KNOWING YOUR CAR

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND DRIVING

IN AN EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND CARE

TECHNICAL DATA

MULTIMEDIA

INDEX

KNOWING YOUR CAR

In-depth knowledge of your new vehicle

starts here.

The booklet that you are reading simply

and directly explains how it is made and

how it works.

That’s why we advise you to read it

seated comfortably on board, so that

you can see immediately what is

described here for yourself.

INSTRUMENT PANEL ...........8

THE KEYS .................11

IGNITION DEVICE ............12

FIAT CODE .................13

DOORS ...................14

SEATS....................16

HEAD RESTRAINTS ...........20

STEERING WHEEL ............21

REAR VIEW MIRRORS .........22

EXTERNAL LIGHTS ...........23

INTERIOR LIGHTS ............26

WINDSCREEN / REAR WINDOW

WIPERS ..................26

CLIMATE CONTROL ...........29

ELECTRIC WINDOWS ..........33

BONNET ..................33

DUALDRIVE ELECTRIC POWER

STEERING .................34

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT ......35

HEADLIGHTS ...............40

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ........41

VERSION WITH LPG SYSTEM ....41

ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTER .......49

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Version with Uconnect™ 3" Radio, Uconnect™ 5" LIVE and Uconnect™ 5" Nav

LIVE

1. Adjustable side air diffusers 2. Left stalk: direction indicators, main beam headlights, flashings 3. Instrument panel

4. Steering wheel controls 5. Right stalk: windscreen wiper/washer, rear window wiper/washer, rain sensor sensitivity level

setting 6. Uconnect™ 7. Control buttons 8. Passenger front airbag 9. Adjustable central air diffusers

10. Glove

compartment 11. Climate controls 12. Buttons on the central console: seat heating, USB port + AUX plug panel,

socket/cigarette lighter 13. Ignition device 14. Driver front airbag 15. Steering wheel controls 16. Control panel: front fog

lights (where present), rear fog lights, headlight alignment adjustment, iTPMS reset, ESC OFF (where present).

P2000085-000-000

KNOWING YOUR CAR

Version with Uconnect™ 7" HD LIVE and Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav LIVE

1. Adjustable side air diffusers 2. Left stalk: direction indicators, main beam headlights, flashings 3. Instrument panel

4. Steering wheel controls 5. Right stalk: windscreen wiper/washer, rear window wiper/washer, rain sensor sensitivity level

setting 6. Uconnect™ 7. Control buttons 8. Passenger front airbag 9. Adjustable central air diffusers

10. Glove

compartment 11. Climate controls 12. Buttons on the central console: seat heating, USB port + AUX plug panel,

socket/cigarette lighter 13. Ignition device 14. Driver front airbag 15. Steering wheel controls 16. Control panel: front fog

lights (where present), rear fog lights, headlight alignment adjustment, iTPMS reset, ESC OFF (where present).

P2000050-000-000

Right hand drive version with Uconnect™ 3" Radio, Uconnect™ 5" LIVE and

Uconnect™ 5" Nav LIVE

1. Adjustable side air diffusers 2.

Left stalk: direction indicators, main beam headlights, flashings3. Instrument panel

4. Steering wheel controls 5.

Right stalk: windscreen wiper/washer, rear window wiper/washer, rain sensor sensitivity level

setting

6.Uconnect™ 7. Control buttons 8 .Passenger front airbag 9 .Adjustable central air diffusers 10. Glove

compartment

11. Climate controls 12. Buttons on the central console: seat heating, USB port + AUX plug panel,

socket/cigarette lighter

13. Ignition device 14. Driver front airbag 15. Steering wheel controls 16. Control panel: front fog

lights (where present),

rear fog lights, headlight alignment adjustment, iTPMS reset, ESC OFF (where present).

PDX00003H

KNOWING YOUR CAR

THE KEYS

KEY WITHOUT REMOTE

CONTROL

The metal insert of the key operates:

the ignition device and the driver's side

door lock.

KEY WITH REMOTE

CONTROL

The metal insert 1 fig. 4 of the key

operates:

the ignition switch;

the driver's door lock.

Press button 2 to open/close the metal

insert.

OPERATION

Unlocking doors and luggage

compartment

Briefly press the button

: unlocking of

doors and luggage compartment, timed

switching-on of internal lights and

double flashing of direction indicators

(where provided).

Door and luggage compartment

locking

Briefly press the

“FIAT” button:

locking of doors and luggage

compartment and single flash of

direction indicators (if present).

Opening the luggage compartment

Rapidly press the

button twice to

open the luggage compartment

remotely.

The direction indicators will flash twice

to indicate that the luggage

compartment has been opened.

REQUEST FOR

ADDITIONAL KEYS

Key with remote control

The system can recognise up to 8 keys

with remote control.

Duplicating keys

Should a new key with remote control

be necessary, go to a Fiat Dealership,

taking an ID document and the car

ownership documents.

REPLACING THE

BATTERY IN THE KEY

WITH REMOTE CONTROL

To replace the battery, proceed as

follows:

operate with a fine bit screwdriver in

the points indicated by the arrows

fig. 5 then remove the rear casing 1

fig. 6;

04016J0001EM

04016J0003EM

04016J0004EM

use a coin to rotate the inspection lid

2 anticlockwise and remove it;

replace battery 3 with a new one

that has the same specifications,

respect polarity;

refit lid 2 rotating it clockwise, then

reclose the rear casing by pressing

gently and make sure it is correctly

locked.

WARNING

1) Press button 2 only with the key away

from your body, especially your eyes and

from objects which could get damaged

(e.g. your clothes). Do not leave the key

unattended to avoid the button being

accidentally pressed while it is being

handled, e.g. by a child.

IMPORTANT

1) The electronic components inside the

key may be damaged if the key is subjected

to strong shocks. In order to ensure

complete efficiency of the electronic

devices inside the key, it should never be

exposed to direct sunlight.

IMPORTANT

1) Used batteries may be harmful to the

environment if not disposed of correctly.

They must be disposed of as specified by

law in the special containers or taken to a

Fiat Dealership, which will take care of their

disposal.

IGNITION DEVICE

OPERATION

The key can be turned to three different

positions fig. 7:

STOP: engine off, key can be

removed, steering column locked (with

key removed). Some electrical devices

(e.g. central door locking system, etc.)

are still available;

MAR: driving position. All electrical

devices are available;

AVV: engine starting.

The ignition device is fitted with a safety

system that requires the ignition key to

be turned back to STOP if the engine

does not start, before the starting

operation can be repeated.

2) 3)

04026J0001EM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

STEERING LOCK

Activation

When the key is in the STOP position,

remove the key and turn the steering

wheel until it locks.

IMPORTANT If the ignition key has been

moved from the MAR to the STOP

position, the steering lock cannot

engage until the key is removed from

the ignition device.

Deactivation

Move the steering wheel slightly and

turn the key to MAR.

4) 5) 6)

WARNING

2) If the ignition device has been tampered

with (e.g. an attempted theft), have it

checked by a Fiat Dealership before driving

again.

3) Always take the key with you when you

leave your vehicle to prevent someone

from accidentally operating the controls.

Remember to engage the parking brake.

Never leave children unattended in the

vehicle.

4) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any

after-market operation involving steering

system or steering column modifications

(e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that

could adversely affect performance,

invalidate the warranty, cause serious

safety problems and also result in the car

not meeting type-approval requirements.

5) Never extract the mechanical key while

the vehicle is moving. The steering wheel

will automatically lock as soon as it is

turned. This holds true for cars being

towed as well.

6) Before exiting the vehicle, ALWAYS

engage the parking brake, steer the

wheels, engage the first gear if uphill and

the reverse if downhill. If the vehicle is

parked on a steep slope, chock the wheels

with wedges or stones. When leaving the

vehicle, always lock all the doors by

pressing the button on the key.

FIAT CODE

The Fiat Code system prevents

unauthorised use of the vehicle,

disabling engine starting.

Operation

Each time the vehicle is started by

turning the ignition key to MAR, the Fiat

Code system control unit sends a

recognition code to the Powertrain

Control Module to deactivate the

immobiliser.

The code is sent only if the Fiat Code

system control unit has acknowledged

the code received from the key.

Each time the ignition key is turned to

STOP, the Fiat Code system

deactivates the functions of the

Powertrain Control Module.

Irregular operation

If, during starting, the key code is not

correctly recognised, the

symbol is

displayed on the instrument panel (see

the instructions in the "Warning lights

and messages" paragraph, "Knowing

the instrument panel" chapter). This

condition leads to the engine switching

off after 2 seconds. In this case, bring

the ignition device to STOP and then to

MAR; if it is still blocked, try with the

other keys provided. If it is still not

possible to start the engine, contact a

Fiat Dealership.

Activation of warning light while

driving

If the symbol is displayed while

driving, this means that the system is

running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a

voltage drop).

If the display persists, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

DOORS

LOCKING / UNLOCKING

DOORS FROM THE

INSIDE

Automatic locking in motion

(where provided)

If all doors are closed properly, they will

automatically be locked once the

vehicle has exceeded 20 km/h

("Autoclose" function).

Manual locking/unlocking

Press the button shown in fig. 8 on the

central dashboard panel.

LED on button on: doors locked.

LED on button off: doors unlocked.

IMPORTANT Operating the handle of

the front doors unlocks all doors and

the tailgate.

LOCKING / UNLOCKING

DOORS FROM THE

OUTSIDE

Locking from the outside

With the doors closed, press the

FIAT" button on the key or fit and then

turn its metal insert in the driver's door

lock.

2) 3)

Door unlocking from the outside

Press the

button on the key or turn

its metal insert in the driver's door lock.

CHILD SAFETY DEVICE

8) 9)

This system prevents the rear doors

from being opened from the inside.

This device 2 fig. 9 can be engaged

only with the doors open:

P2000022-000-000

04056J0008EM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

position A: device engaged (door

locked);

position B: device not engaged

(door may be opened from the inside).

The device remains engaged even if the

doors are electrically unlocked.

IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot be

opened from the inside when the child

safety device is engaged.

Passenger side front door and rear

door emergency locking device

Used to lock the doors when there is no

electrical power supply. Insert the metal

insert of the ignition key in position

1 indicated in fig. 9 (passenger side

front door) or 1 fig. 10 (rear doors) and

then turn the key clockwise and then

remove it from position 1.

Door opening/closing mechanism

initialisation

If the battery is disconnected or the

protection fuse blows, the door

opening/closing mechanism must be

initialised as follows:

close all the doors;

press the button on the remote

control;

press the button on the remote

control.

WARNING

7) If the child lock was engaged and the

previously described locking procedure

carried out, operating the internal opening

handle will not open the door: in this case,

to open the door, the outside handle must

be used. The door central locking/

unlocking button is not disabled by the

engagement of the emergency lock.

8) NEVER leave children unattended inside

the car, let alone leave the car with the

doors unlocked in a place that children can

access easily. Children may seriously, or

even fatally, injure themselves. Also ensure

that children do not inadvertently operate

the parking brake or the brake pedal.

9) Always use this device when carrying

children. After engaging the child lock on

both rear doors, check for effective

engagement by trying to open a door with

the internal handle.

IMPORTANT

2) Make sure to take the key with you once

a door or the tailgate is locked, to prevent

locking the same key inside the vehicle. If

the key has been locked in, it can only be

recovered using the second provided key.

3) If the child lock was engaged and the

previously described locking procedure

carried out, operating the internal opening

handle will not open the door: in this case,

to open the door, the outside handle must

be used. The central locking/unlocking

button is not disabled by the engagement

of the emergency lock.

04056J0007EM

SEATS

The front seats can be adjusted so as

to ensure maximum comfort for the

occupants.

Driver seat adjustment must also be

carried out remembering that, keeping

the shoulders resting firmly against the

backrest, the wrists must be able to

reach the top of the steering wheel rim.

It must also be possible to fully depress

the clutch pedal with the left foot.

FRONT SEATS WITH

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT

10)

Longitudinal adjustment

Lift lever 1 fig. 11 and push the seat

forwards or backwards.

11)

IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment

while sitting on the seat involved (driver

side or passenger side).

Height adjustment

(where provided)

Move lever 2 upwards or downwards to

achieve the required height.

IMPORTANT Carry out the adjustment

while sitting on the seat involved (driver

side or passenger side).

Backrest angle adjustment

Pull lever 3 and accompanying the

backrest with the movement of your

torso (operate the lever until the desired

position is reached, then release it).

Electric lumbar adjustment

(where provided)

When the ignition device is at MAR,

press button 1 fig. 12 to adjust the

lumbar area support, until the maximum

driving comfort is achieved.

FRONT SEAT ELECTRIC

HEATING

(where provided)

13) 14)

With ignition device in the MAR

position, press buttons

fig. 13 on the

dashboard.

After selecting seat heating, you need

to wait for two to five minutes until the

effect is noticed.

P2000013-000-000

P2000012-000-000

P2000018-000-000

KNOWING YOUR CAR

IMPORTANT To preserve the battery

charge, this function cannot be

activated when the engine is off.

REAR SEATS

The luggage compartment can be

partially (1/3 or 2/3) or totally extended

by splitting the rear seat.

Partial extension of the luggage

compartment (1/3 or 2/3)

(where provided)

12)

Extending the right side of the luggage

compartment allows you to carry two

passengers on the left part of the rear

seat, while extending the left side allows

you to carry just one passenger.

TIPO 5DOOR version

Proceed as follows:

completely lower the rear seat head

restraints;

operate release device 1 (right or left)

fig. 14 to fold the required backrest

section;

use the tab 1 fig. 15 (one on each

side) to position the seat belt to the side

of the seat to prevent it interfering with

folding the backrest;

IMPORTANT As shown in fig. 15, the

seat belt (in its position by the side of

the seats obtained by using tongue 1)

must not be twisted.

fold the required seat back portion.

TIPO STATION WAGON version

Proceed as follows:

completely lower the rear seat head

restraints;

pull the tab 1 fig. 16 and accompany

the cushion by pulling the seat forwards

(right or left) as shown in fig. 16;

after you have folded the seat

cushion, position the left and central

seat belt fastening devices 2

fig. 17 under the relative elastic

retainers on the mat.

IMPORTANT To avoid the risk of

damage, always fold the seat cushion

and position the seat belt fastening

devices 2 fig. 17 under the elastic

retainers before folding down the

backrest.

04066J0007EM

P2000073-000-000

after positioning the seat belt

fastening devices under the relative

elastic retainers), operate the release

device 1 fig. 14 (right or left) to fold the

desired portion of the backrest;

use the tab 1 fig. 15 (one on each

side) to position the seat belt to the side

of the seat to prevent it interfering with

folding the backrest;

IMPORTANT As shown in fig. 15, the

seat belt (in its position by the side of

the seats obtained by using tongue 1)

must not be twisted.

once folded, the seat and backrest

will be position as shown in fig. 18.

Total luggage compartment

extension

TIPO 5DOOR version

Tilting the rear seat backrest completely

forwards allows maximum loading

volume.

To increase the loading volume, the rear

parcel shelf can be removed, see the

next paragraph.

TIPO STATION WAGON version

The rear seat can be folded down

completely with the lower seat portion

to have a larger loading volume.

Once folded, the seats and backrests

will be position as shown in fig. 19.

P2000105

P2000139

P2000106

P2000130

KNOWING YOUR CAR

Removing the rear parcel shelf

(TIPO 5DOOR version)

To remove the parcel shelf, proceed as

follows:

open the tailgate and unhook the two

side cords (one on each side) from their

supports;

free the parcel shelf from the pins 1

fig. 20 (one on each side) and remove

it, keeping it flat as exits from the

tailgate.

The removed parcel shelf 1 fig. 21 can

temporarily be put behind the front

seats as shown.

Repositioning the backrests

12)

Raise the backrests and push them

back until the locking click of both

retainers is heard. Visually check that

the red marks have disappeared from

the release devices 1 fig. 14. The

presence of the red notches indicates

that the backrest is not secured.

Seat repositioning

(TIPO STATION WAGON version)

After repositioning the backrests,

remove the seat belt fastening devices

from the elastic retainers and make sure

that they are free to turn. Check that

there are no objects on the cushion

surface, turn the backrests backwards,

insert them under the backrest and

press downwards until they click.

Visually check that the correct position

they had before they were tipped is

restored.

IMPORTANT Always free the seat belt

fastening devices before repositioning

the seat cushion to allow it to be

repositioned correctly without damage.

WARNING

10) All adjustments must be made with the

car stationary.

11) Once you have released the

adjustment lever, always check that the

seat is locked on the guides by trying to

move it back and forth. If the seat is not

locked into place, it may unexpectedly slide

and cause the driver to lose control of the

car.

12) Make sure the backrests are properly

secured at both sides (not visible "red

notches) to prevent them from moving

forward, in the event of sharp braking, with

possible impact with of the passengers.

13) People who can't feel skin pain due to

advanced age, chronic diseases, diabetes,

spine damage, medication, alcohol,

exhaustion, or other physical conditions,

must be careful when using the seat

heater. It could cause burns even at a low

temperature, especially when used for long

periods of time.

P1030178-000-002

P1030216-000-000

14) Do not place objects on the seat or on

the backrest that may isolate the heat,

such as a cover or a pillow. It may cause

the seat heating device to overheat. Sitting

on an overheated seat may cause severe

burns due to the increase in temperature of

the seat surface.

IMPORTANT

4) The fabric upholstery of the seats has

been designed to withstand long-term wear

deriving from normal use of the car. Some

precautions are however required. Avoid

prolonged and/or excessive rubbing

against clothing accessories such as metal

buckles and Velcro strips which, by

applying a high pressure on the fabric in a

small area, could cause it to break, thereby

damaging the upholstery.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

15)

FRONT HEAD

RESTRAINTS

Adjustment

They can be adjusted to 4 height

positions (completely raised /

2 intermediate positions / completely

lowered).

Upward adjustment: raise the head

restraint until it clicks into place.

Downward adjustment: press button 1

fig. 22 and lower the head restraint.

Removal

Proceed as follows to remove the head

restraint:

tilt the backrest (to prevent it from

coming into contact with the roof);

press both buttons 1 and 2 fig. 22 at

the side of the two supports, then

remove the head restraint.

IMPORTANT Always reposition the

head restraints if they have been

removed before starting to drive

normally.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

Adjustment

Two side and one central head

restraints (where present) can be

height-adjusted to 3 positions

(completely raised / intermediate /

completely lowered) are provided for

the rear seats

Upward adjustment: raise the head

restraint until it clicks into place.

Travelling with the head restraints in the

not-in-use position (all low) occupied

rear seats is not advised.

On some versions, the label shown in

fig. 23 reminds the passenger using the

04076J0001EM

04076J0002EM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

rear seat to correctly adjust the head

restraint by lifting it up to one of the two

possible positions.

IMPORTANT To permit maximum

visibility for the driver, if the head

restraints are not used, they are moved

to the rest position: fully down.

Downward adjustment: press button 1

fig. 24 and lower the head restraint.

WARNING

15) Head restraints must be adjusted so

that the head, rather than the neck, rests

on them. Only in this case they can protect

your head correctly. Any removed head

restraints must be repositioned correctly, in

order to protect the occupants in the event

of impact: follow the instructions above.

STEERING WHEEL

16) 17)

ADJUSTMENTS

The steering wheel can be adjusted

both in height and axially.

To adjust the position bring the lever 1

fig. 25 down to position B after which

the steering wheel can be adjusted to

the most suitable position and

subsequently locked in this position by

bringing lever 1 to position A again.

WARNING

16) All adjustments must be carried out

only with the car stationary and engine

stopped.

17) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out

any after-market operation involving

steering system or steering column

modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft

device) that could adversely affect

performance and safety, invalidate the

warranty and also result in the car not

meeting type-approval requirements.

P20000009-000-000

P2000087-000-000

REAR VIEW

MIRRORS

INTERIOR MIRROR

Manual adjustment

Operate lever 1 fig. 26 to adjust the

mirror into two different positions:

normal or anti-glare.

Electrochromic mirror

(where provided)

The electrochromic mirror can

automatically modify its reflecting action

to prevent dazzling the driver fig. 27.

The electrochromic mirror has an

ON/OFF button to activate/deactivate

the electrochromic anti-glare function.

When reverse gear is engaged, the

mirror is automatically set for daytime

use.

DOOR MIRRORS

18)

Electric adjustment

The mirrors can only be adjusted with

the ignition device at MAR.

To carry out the adjustment, proceed as

follows:

use switch 1 fig. 28 to select the

mirror (left or right) to be adjusted;

adjust the mirror by moving the

switch 2 fig. 28 in the four directions.

Manual folding

When required (for example when the

shape causes difficulty in narrow

spaces), it is possible to fold the mirrors

by moving them from position A to

position B fig. 29.

04106J0001EM

04106J0002EM

04106J0003EM

04106J0004EM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

Heated

Pressing the

button (heated rear

window) on the central dashboard

panel activates the demisting/defrosting

of the external rear view mirrors.

WARNING

18) As the driver's door mirror is curved, it

may slightly alter the perception of

distance.

EXTERNAL LIGHTS

The left-hand stalk 1 fig. 30 operates

most of the external lights. The exterior

lights turn on also with the ignition key

in the MAR position. The instrument

panel and the various dashboard

controls will come on with the external

lights.

DAYTIME RUNNING

LIGHTS (DRL)

"Daytime Running Lights"

19) 20)

With the key in MAR position and the

ring nut turned to the

position, the

daytime running lights and the rear side

lights switch on automatically; the other

lights and the internal lighting remain

off. If the daytime running lights are

deactivated (for versions/markets where

it is provided), no light comes on when

the ring nut is turned to

DIPPED HEADLIGHTS

With the ignition key turned to MAR,

turn the ring nut 1 fig. 30 to

.Ifthe

dipped beam headlights are activated,

the daytime running lights are switched

off and the dipped beam headlights,

rear side lights and number plate lights

are switched on. The

warning light

switches on in the instrument panel.

PARKING LIGHTS

These lights can be turned on with

ignition device in STOP position or with

the key removed, by moving the left

stalk ring nut first to position

and

then to position

The

warning light switches on in

the instrument panel.

Repeat the same operation to switch

them off.

AUTO FUNCTION

(Dusk sensor)

(where provided)

This is an infrared LED sensor that

works in conjunction with the rain

sensor and is located on the

windscreen. It is able to detect

variations in outside lighting based on

the light sensitivity set in the display

Menu or the Uconnect™ 5" or 7" HD

system (where provided).

04126J0001EM

The higher the sensitivity, the lower the

amount of external light needed to

automatically switch the external lights

on.

Function activation

Turn the left stalk ring nut to position

IMPORTANT The function can only be

activated with the ignition device at

MAR.

Function deactivation

To deactivate the function, turn the left

stalk ring nut to a position other than

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

With ring nut in position , push the

stalk forward toward the dashboard

(stable position). The

warning light

switches on in the instrument panel.

They are switched off by pulling the

stalk towards the steering wheel.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

Flashing the headlights

Pull the left stalk 1 fig. 31 toward

yourself, to the stable position; the stalk

goes back to the central stable position

when it is released.

With main beam headlights on, the

warning light on the instrument

panel will come on at the same time.

HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT

CORRECTOR

The headlight alignment corrector

operates with ignition device at MAR

and dipped headlights on.

Press

and on the control panel.

The display located on the instrument

panel provides a visual indication of the

adjusted position.

Position 0: one or two people on

the front seats;

Position 1: 4 or 5 passengers;

Position 2: 4 or 5 passengers + load

in the luggage compartment;

Position 3: driver + maximum

admissible load stowed only in the

luggage compartment.

IMPORTANT Check the headlight

alignment each time the weight of the

load transported changes.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

(where provided)

Press button 1 fig. 33 to switch on the

fog lights. With fog lights on, the

warning light on the instrument

panel will come on at the same time.

The front fog lights are activated when

the dipped headlights are on.

Press button 1 again to switch the

lights off.

04126J0002EM

04126J0003EM

04126J0008EM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

Cornering lights

The function activates with the main

beam headlights switched on with a

speed lower than 40 km/h - For wide

wheel rotation angles or at the

switching on the direction indicator, a

light will turn on (built in the front fog

light) referring to the turning side which

will extend the night visibility angle.

REAR FOG LIGHT

(where provided)

When the dipped beam headlights are

on, these can be activated by pressing

button 1 fig. 34. With the light on, the

warning light in the instrument panel

switches on.

Press the button again to switch off; the

rear fog light also switches off

automatically by switching off the

dipped beam headlights or the fog

lights.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Bring the left stalk 1 fig. 31 to the

(stable) position:

upwards: activates the right direction

indicator;

downwards: activates the left direction

indicator.

The

or warning light respectively

will flash on the instrument panel.

The direction indicators switch off

automatically when the steering wheel

is straightened or when the daytime

running lights (D.R.L.) /parking lights are

activated.

"FOLLOW ME HOME"

DEVICE

Activation

Bring the ignition device to STOP.

Within 2 minutes pull the left stalk in

main beam headlights flashing mode,

each displacement of the stalk will

correspond to an increment of

30 seconds of delay on headlights

switching off up to a maximum of

210 seconds (equal to 7 flashes).

Deactivation

Keep the left stalk in main beam

headlight flashing mode for a few

seconds.

WARNING

19) The daytime running lights are an

alternative to the dipped headlights for

driving during the daytime in countries

where it is compulsory to have lights on

during the day; where it is not compulsory,

the use of daytime running lights is

permitted.

20) Daytime running lights cannot replace

dipped beam headlights when driving at

night or through tunnels. The use of

daytime running lights is governed by the

highway code of the country in which you

are driving. Comply with legal

requirements.

04126J0009EM

INTERIOR LIGHTS

FRONT CEILING LIGHT

Switch 1 fig. 35 is used to switch on/off

the ceiling light bulbs.

Switch 1 positions:

central position: lights 2 and 5 switch

on/off when the doors are

opened/closed;

pressed to the left (OFF): lights 2 and

5 are always switched off;

pressed to the right ( ): lights

2 and 5 are always switched on.

The lights switch on/off gradually.

Switch 3 switches on/off light 2.

Switch 4 switches on/off light 5.

IMPORTANT Before getting out of the

vehicle, make sure that the roof light

bulbs are off; this will prevent the

battery from being drained once the

doors are closed. In any case, if a light

is left on by mistake, the ceiling light

switches off automatically about

15 minutes after the engine has been

switched off.

Ceiling light timing

On certain versions, to facilitate getting

in/out of the vehicle at night or in

poorly-lit areas, two timed modes have

been provided.

Timing while getting into the car

The ceiling lights switch on according to

the following modes:

for a few seconds when the doors

are unlocked;

for about 3 minutes when one of the

doors is opened;

for a few seconds when the doors

are locked.

Timing is interrupted when the ignition

device is turned to MAR.

Timing while getting out of the car

The roof lights come on when the key is

removed from the ignition within

2 minutes of switching off the engine,

on opening and closing a door with the

removed key.

The timing stops automatically when

the doors are locked.

WINDSCREEN /

REAR WINDOW

WIPERS

The right stalk controls screen

wiper/washer operation.

Operation is only possible with the

ignition device at MAR.

WINDSCREEN WIPER /

WASHER

Operation

21)

5) 6)

Ring 1 fig. 36 can be set to the

following positions:

windscreen wiper off

slow intermittent operation

fast intermittent operation

LOW

slow continuous operation

HIGH

fast continuous operation

MIST function

04136J0001EM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

Move the stalk upwards (unstable

position) to activate the MIST

function: operation is limited to the

time for which the stalk is held in this

position. When released, the stalk will

return to its default position and the

windscreen wiper will be stopped.

“Smart washing” function

Pull the stalk towards the steering

wheel (unstable position) to operate the

windscreen washer.

When the stalk is held pulled for longer

than half a second, the windscreen

wiper is moved with active control.

When the driver releases the stalk, the

windscreen wiper makes three strokes.

Afterwards, if the control is in position

, the washing cycle is concluded by

one last stroke after a 6 second pause.

If the position is LOW or HIGH, the

smart washing function is not carried

out.

“Service Position” function

This function makes it possible to

replace the wipers or protect them in

conditions of ice and/or snow.

It can only be activated after stopping

the engine.

The "Service Position" function can be

explicitly requested within two minutes

of stopping the engine, when the

wipers have correctly returned to the

parking position.

The function can be activated by

turning the ring nut to position

and

moving the stalk upwards, to the MIST

position, more than three times. The

activations are used to position the

wipers as preferred. The function is

deactivated when the vehicle is turned

on, with a wiping request or when the

vehicle is moving (speed above

5 Km/h).

IMPORTANT Make sure, when starting

the engine, that the windscreen is free

of snow or ice before turning the

ignition key.

RAIN SENSOR

(where provided)

7) 8)

This is a device located behind the

interior rear view mirrorfig. 37, in

contact with the windscreen and can

measure the amount of rain and,

consequently, manage the automatic

wiping mode of the windscreen in

accordance with the amount of water

on the screen (see the “Automatic

Wiping” paragraph).

REAR WINDOW WIPER /

WASHER

Ring nut 2, shown in fig. 38 can be set

to the following positions:

rear window wiper stopped

intermittent operation

continuous operation, without

pausing between two strokes.

P2000061-000-000

04146J0003EM

The rear window wiper can be activated

in the following ways:

intermittent with a 2-second pause

between two strokes, when ring nut 2 is

in position

and the windscreen

wiper is not in operation;

synchronous (at half the windscreen

wiper frequency), when ring nut 2 is in

position

and the windscreen

wiper is in operation or when ring nut

2 is in position

, reverse gear is

engaged and the windscreen wiper is in

operation;

continuous when ring nut 2 is in

position

Push the stalk towards the dashboard

(rocking position) to activate the rear

window washer jet. Keep pushing the

lever to automatically activate both the

rear window washer jet and the rear

window wiper with a single movement.

Releasing the stalk will activate three

strokes, as described for the

windscreen wiper. If the position is

(rear window wiper stopped), after a

6 second pause, the washing cycle is

completed by a single stroke. The

smart wash cycle will not be performed

if the position is

WARNING

21) If the window needs to be cleaned,

make sure the device is deactivated or the

key is on STOP.

IMPORTANT

5) Never use the windscreen wipers to

remove layers of snow or ice from the

windscreen. In such conditions, the

windscreen wiper may be subjected to

excessive stress and the motor cut-out

switch, which prevents operation for a few

seconds, may intervene. If operation is not

subsequently restored, even after restarting

the engine, contact a Fiat Dealership.

6) Do not operate the windscreen wiper

with the blades lifted from the windscreen.

7) Do not activate the rain sensor when

washing the car in an automatic car wash.

8) Make sure the device is switched off if

there is ice on the windscreen.

P2000062-000-000

KNOWING YOUR CAR

CLIMATE CONTROL

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

Controls

P2000027-000-000

1 — air temperature adjustment knob

(hot/cold air mixing):

Red section = hot air;

Blue section = cold air.

2 — fan activation/adjustment knob:

0 = fan off;

1-2-3 = fan speed;

4 = maximum fan speed.

3 — internal air recirculation on/off

button;

4 — air distribution knob

air flow from central and side vents

air flow from central vents, side

vents and front/rear footwell vents

air flow from the front and rear

footwell vents and a light air flow

also from the side vents on the

dashboard

air flow from the front and rear

footwell vents, to the windscreen,

the side windows and a light air

flow also at the side vents on the

dashboard

air flow to the windscreen, the

side windows and a light air flow

also at the side vents on the

dashboard

5 — climate control compressor on/off

button;

6 — heated rear window

demisting/defrosting on/off button.

KNOWING YOUR CAR

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

Controls

P2000028-000-000

1 - passenger compartment

temperature adjustment knob; the set

temperature is shown on the display;

2 - MAX A/C function on button;

3 - climate control compressor on/off

button;

4 - button for activating the MAX DEF

function (fast front window

defrosting/demisting);

5 - climate control system on/off

button;

6 - fan speed adjustment knob; the set

speed is shown on the display;

7 - air distribution selection buttons;

8 - heated rear window on/off button;

9 - internal air recirculation on/off

button;

10 - AUTO function activation button

(automatic operation).

Air distribution selection

By pressing the buttons / / ,it

is possible to set one of the 5 possible

air distributions manually:

Air flow to the windscreen and front

side window vents to

demist/defrost them.

Air flow at central and side

dashboard vents to ventilate the

chest and the face during the hot

season.

Air flow to the front and rear

footwell vents. This air distribution

setting heats the passenger

compartment most quickly, giving a

prompt sensation of warmth.

Air flow distributed between

footwell vents (hotter air) and

central and side dashboard

vents (cooler air). This air

distribution setting is useful in

spring and autumn on sunny

days.

Air flow distributed between

footwell vents and windscreen

and front side vents. This

distribution setting allows the

passenger compartment to be

warmed up efficiently and

prevents the windows from

misting up.

In AUTO mode, the climate control

system automatically manages air

distribution (the LEDs on buttons 7 are

off). When set manually, the air

distribution is indicated by the LEDs on

the selected buttons switching on.

In combined function mode the relevant

function is enabled simultaneously with

those already set by pressing the

corresponding button. If a button

whose function is already active is

pressed, the operation is cancelled and

the corresponding LED switches off. To

restore automatic control of the air

distribution after a manual selection,

press the AUTO button.

Start&Stop

(where provided)

The automatic climate control system

manages the Start&Stop system

(engine off when vehicle speed is equal

to 0 km/h) to ensure adequate comfort

inside the vehicle.

When the Start&Stop system is on

(engine off and vehicle at a standstill),

the automatic recirculation

management is turned off always taking

air in from outside, to reduce the

probability of the windows misting up

(as the compressor is off).

IMPORTANT

2) The system uses a coolant that is

compatible with the laws in force in

countries where the vehicle is sold, R134a

or R1234yf. In case of a recharge

operation, only use the gas indicated on

the label placed in the engine

compartment. The use of other coolants

affects the efficiency and condition of the

system. The lubricant used for the

compressor is also strictly linked to the type

of cooling gas, please refer to a Fiat

Dealership.

KNOWING YOUR CAR

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

22)

Electric windows operate with the

ignition device at MAR and for about

3 minutes after the ignition device

switches to STOP (or key removed).

When one of the front doors is opened

this operation is disabled.

Driver side front door controls

All windows can be controlled from the

driver side door panel fig. 41.

1: front left window opening/closing.

"Continuous automatic" operation

during the window opening/closing

stage;

2: front right window opening/

closing. "Continuous automatic"

operation during the window opening

stage;

3: enabling/disabling of rear door

electric window controls;

4: right rear window opening/closing

(if present);

5: left rear window opening/closing

(if present).

Front passenger side door and rear

door controls

On the passenger side front door

control panel, buttons are provided to

control the associated windows.

The trims of the rear door panels

include the buttons for controlling the

relevant windows.

WARNING

22) Incorrect use of the electric windows

may be dangerous. Before and during

operation, always check that nobody is

exposed to the risk of being injured either

directly by the moving window or through

objects getting caught or hit by it. When

leaving the vehicle (equipped with

mechanical key with remote control),

always remove the key from the ignition

device to prevent accidental operation of

the electric windows from being a hazard

for those still on board.

BONNET

OPENING

Proceed as follows:

pull the lever 1 fig. 42, located in the

driver's side pedal area, in the direction

of the arrow;

adjust the lever 2 fig. 43 in the

direction indicated by the arrow;

04166J0001EM

04196J0001EM

04196J0002EM

raise the bonnet and, at the same

time, release the bonnet stay 3

fig. 44 from its locking device, then

insert the end of the stay in the housing

4 in the bonnet.

IMPORTANT Before raising the bonnet,

make sure that the arms of the wipers

are not raised from the windscreen and

that the wiper is not operational.

23) 24) 25)

CLOSING

26)

Proceed as follows:

hold the bonnet up with one hand

and with the other remove the stay 3

fig. 44 from the housing 4 and fit it back

in locking device;

lower the bonnet to approximately

40 centimetres from the engine

compartment and let it drop. Make sure

that the bonnet is completely closed

and not only fastened by the locking

device by trying to open it. If it is not

perfectly closed, do not try to press the

bonnet lid down but open it and repeat

the procedure.

IMPORTANT Always check that the

bonnet is closed correctly to prevent it

from opening while the vehicle is

travelling.

WARNING

23) Perform these operations only when

the car is stationary.

24) The bonnet may drop suddenly if the

supporting rod is not positioned correctly.

25) Use both hands to lift the bonnet.

Before lifting, check that the windscreen

wiper arms are not raised from the

windscreen, that the vehicle is stationary

and that the parking brake is engaged.

26) For safety reasons, the bonnet must

always be properly closed while the car is

travelling. Therefore, make sure that the

bonnet is properly closed and that the lock

is engaged. If you discover that the bonnet

is not perfectly closed during travel, stop

immediately and close the bonnet in the

correct manner.

DUALDRIVE

ELECTRIC POWER

STEERING

This only operates with the key turned

to MAR and the engine started. The

electric steering allows the force

required at the steering wheel to be

adjusted to suit driving conditions.

POWER STEERING

ACTIVATION/

DEACTIVATION

27) 28)

Activation/deactivation:

Press the fig. 45 button.

The activation of the function is

signalled by a visual indication (CITY) on

the instrument panel or, based on the

version, on the display.

04196J0003EM

P2000025-000-000

KNOWING YOUR CAR

When the CITY function is on, the

steering wheel effort is lighter, making

parking easier: therefore, this function is

particularly useful for driving in city

centres.

To ensure steering uniformity, when the

key is pressed while the steering wheel

is being turned, the change of force will

only be felt when it is turned in the

opposite direction, or the steering

wheel is released.

WARNING

27) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out

any after-market operation involving

steering system or steering column

modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft

device) that could adversely affect

performance, invalidate the warranty, cause

serious safety problems and also result in

the car not meeting type-approval

requirements.

28) Before performing any maintenance

operations, always stop the engine and

remove the key from the ignition to lock the

steering column (especially when the car

wheels are not touching the ground). If this

is not possible (for example if the key

needs to be turned to MAR or the engine

must be running), remove the main fuse

that protects the electric power steering.

LUGGAGE

COMPARTMENT

IMPORTANT When travelling, do not

put any object on the rear parcel shelf

because they can injure passengers in

the event of an accident or sudden

braking.

OPENING

29)

Tailgate opening

When the central locking system is

unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

from outside the car using the electric

opening handle (where provided)

fig. 46 located under the handle until

the unlocking click is heard.

The roof light inside the luggage

compartment will turn on when the

tailgate is opened; the roof light will

automatically switch off when the

tailgate is closed (see also "Interior

lights").

If the tailgate is left open, the roof light

will automatically switch off to preserve

the battery charge.

Emergency opening from inside

Proceed as follows:

lower the head restraints and fold the

backrests;

identify and remove yellow guard A

fig. 47, which is press-fitted on the lock,

using the screwdriver provided;

insert the screwdriver in order to

activate tab B fig. 48, to mechanically

release the lock.

P2000015-000-000

P2000092-000-000

CLOSING

To close the tailgate, lower it onto the

lock until you hear it click.

IMPORTANT Before closing the tailgate

make sure that you have the keys,

since the tailgate is automatically

locked.

INITIALISATION

IMPORTANT If the battery is

disconnected or the protective fuse

blows, the tailgate opening/closing

mechanism must be reinitialised as

follows:

close all the doors and the tailgate;

press the " FIAT" button on the

remote control;

press the button on the remote

control.

TOOL BOX

(where provided)

It consists of a preformed box

fig. 49 (for TIPO 5DOOR versions) or

fig. 50 (for TIPO STATION WAGON

versions), which is located in the

luggage compartment and can be used

to store objects, making it possible to

have a flat load platform.

SECURING YOUR LOAD

TIPO 5DOOR version

There are four rings at the corners of

the luggage compartment (two at the

front 1 and two at the rear 2 fig. 51 ) for

attaching cables for firmly securing the

carried load.

TIPO STATION WAGON version

There are four rings in the luggage

compartment (two at the front 1 and

two at the rear 2 fig. 52 ) for anchoring

the carried load.

P2000093-000-000

04206J005EM

P2000123

P1030204-000-000

KNOWING YOUR CAR

LUGGAGE COVERING

CURTAIN

TIPO STATION WAGON version

30)

Complete closure

Using the specific handle 1, pull the

luggage covering curtain back

fig. 53 and secure it to the retainers 2

fig. 54 arranged by the side.

Complete closure as shown in fig. 55 is

obtained in this manner.

Partial closure

The curtain can be partially closed by

securing it to the retainers placed in

intermediate position fig. 56.

Opening

By means of the specific handle, pull

the luggage covering curtain slightly

towards yourself to release it from the

retainers and then move it manually.

P2000118

P2000131

P2000109

P2000111

P2000110

Removal

Proceed as follows to remove the

curtain:

wind it up as described above;

pull the unlock lever 1 on the far right

upwards and keep it lifted up fig. 58;

raise the right end of the winder

2 and pull out the left end as well.

Refitting

Proceed as follows to refit the curtain:

insert the left end of the winder 2

fig. 58 in the specific housing;

pull the unlock lever 1 on the far right

upwards and keep it lifted up;

insert the right end of the curtain in

position and lock the winder.

DOUBLE LOAD

COMPARTMENT

TIPO STATION WAGON version

The vehicle is equipped with a load

platform with two height adjustments,

so that the load threshold can be flat

and the luggage compartment volume

can be varied.

Keeping the load platform in the upper

position you can use the space under it

as a further compartment to store

fragile or small items.

To access the compartment under the

load compartment, proceed as follows:

lift up the load platform 1 using the

handle 2 fig. 59 and rest it on the two

side stops 3 fig. 60.

Positioning the load platform on the

lower level

The load capacity can be further

extended by lowering the luggage

compartment surface as follows:

lift the load platform 1 using the

specific handle 2 fig. 59;

extract the load platform from the

luggage compartment;

P2000112

P2000113

P2000114

P2000115

KNOWING YOUR CAR

place it back in the luggage

compartment being careful to rest it on

the lower level fig. 61 and not the upper

level 1.

To move the load platform to upper

level, proceed as follows:

lift the load platform 1 using the

specific handle 2;

extract the load platform from the

luggage compartment;

place it back in the luggage

compartment making it rest on the

upper level 1fig. 61 to make the

threshold of the load platform flat

fig. 62.

SIDEBOARDS

TIPO STATION WAGON version

Two sideboards 1 (one per side)

fig. 63 are present by the side of the

load platform.

Simply pull it upwards to remove them

from the housing in which they are

accommodated.

To insert them, make the part 1 of the

sideboard fig. 64 with the slot 2 of the

housing fig. 65 in which it must be

placed and make is slide downwards.

WARNING

29) Take care not to knock objects on the

roof rack when opening the tailgate.

P2000116

P2000112

P2000119

P2000120

P2000121

30) In the event of an accident or sharp

braking, any object placed on the curtain

may be projected into the passenger

compartment, and risk hurting the

occupants.

IMPORTANT

9) The dimensions of the platform permit a

maximum distributed weight capacity of

95 kg: do not load objects with a greater

weight.

HEADLIGHTS

LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION

The correct aiming of the headlights is

important for the comfort and safety of

not only the driver but all other road

users. This is also covered by a specific

rule of the highway code.

The headlights must be correctly

aligned to guarantee the best visibility

conditions for all drivers while travelling

with headlights on.

Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the

headlights checked and adjusted.

Check light beam alignment every time

the load or its distribution changes.

FOG LIGHTS ALIGNMENT

(where provided)

Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the

headlights checked and adjusted.

ADJUSTING THE

HEADLIGHTS WHEN

ABROAD

Dipped beam headlights are adjusted

for driving in the country where the

vehicle was originally purchased.

When travelling in countries with

opposite driving direction, to avoid

dazzling the drivers on the other side of

the road, you need to cover areas of

the headlight according to the Highway

code of the country you are travelling in:

(front right headlight), (front left

headlight).

Versions with bi-parabolic

headlights

fig. 66: mask for right driving, left

headlight;

fig. 67: mask for right driving, right

headlight.

04126J0004EM

04126J0005EM

KNOWING YOUR CAR

ROOF RACK/SKI

RACK

The vehicle might be equipped with two

transversal bars which, with the

addition of special accessories, can be

used to carry various objects (e.g. skis,

surfboards, bikes, etc.).

The front couplings are located in

points 1 fig. 68.

The rear couplings are located in points

Points 1 can be accessed with the

doors open, points 2 can be accessed

with the rear doors open.

31)

10) 11)

Refer to the instructions provided by

the manufacturer of the purchased

crossbars for installation. For further

information, contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

31) Before driving, make sure that the

transversal bars have been fitted properly.

IMPORTANT

10) Never exceed the maximum permitted

loads (see the "Weights" paragraph in the

"Technical specifications" chapter).

11) Fully comply with the regulations in

force concerning maximum clearance.

VERSION WITH LPG

SYSTEM

32) 33)

12) 13) 14) 15)

INTRODUCTION

The LPG version features two fuel

supply systems: one for petrol and one

for LPG.

WHAT IS LPG?

LPG (the abbreviation of “Liquefied

Petroleum Gas”) is a mixture of gas

used as an economical and safe

primary energy source.

Its main components are propane and

butane mixed in various proportions.

These gases are a product of oil refining

and are also naturally present in oil

fields and methane-producing deposits.

In its natural state this mixture takes the

form of a gas, but as the pressure

increases, at room temperature, it can

easily be turned into liquid.

LPG is a fuel with a low environmental

impact because it reduces the pollution

produced by vehicle exhaust gases.

04256J0001EM

LPG MULTIPOINT

INJECTION SYSTEM

This product is produced by working

closely with qualified suppliers in the

LPG sector.

The injection system used on the car is

an efficient system in terms of engine

performance and is based on the

injection of LPG in a gaseous state.

In this system with four injectors, one

for each intake manifold, the fuel is

injected directly into the engine heat

transfer ducts, thereby metering the

LPG very precisely improving

combustion and, at the same time,

excluding any possibility of flame return.

By adapting the electronic control

technology of petrol engines to meet

LPG specifications, significant results in

terms of driveability and controlling

exhaust emissions have been obtained.

When running on LPG the engine has

almost the same torque and power

features as when running on petrol:

consequently, the car performance can

be compared.

SELECTION OF THE FUEL

SUPPLY TYPE

The car is configured for running

independently on either petrol or LPG.

The engine always starts up on petrol,

with automatic switching to LPG when

the best conditions are achieved

(engine water temperature, minimum

engine rpm limit) for switching to LPG.

In addition, it is advisable to periodically

use up the petrol in the tank (until the

reserve warning light comes on) in order

to ensure that the petrol does not

become old and possibly deteriorate.

The petrol/LPG switch fig. 69 allows

drivers to select petrol or LPG

operation.

IMPORTANT There must therefore

always be some petrol in the tank to

protect the petrol pump and to

guarantee temporary switching from

LPG to petrol operation, if high

performance is required.

PASSIVE SAFETY/ACTIVE

SAFETY

Passive safety

The car has the same passive safety

specifications as other versions. In

particular, the mountings of the tank

(located in the space-saver wheel

housing) have been designed to comply

with the Fiat safety standards for impact

tests.

When running on LPG, the flow of gas

(in a liquid state) leaving the tank

passes through the specific piping to

the pressure regulator unit, where there

is a safety solenoid valve that stops the

flow of LPG when the ignition key is

removed or when the driver selects a

fuel change (decision to run on petrol).

Together with the regulator solenoid

valve, a second solenoid valve, in the

tank, closes the LPG piping at the tank

outlet.

The two solenoid valves are connected

to the fuel cut-off system (Fire

Protection System).

The LPG tank complies with the current

legal regulations of the countries where

the car is sold.

Active safety

The car has the same active safety

specifications as other versions.

Although the LPG system has

PGL00001

KNOWING YOUR CAR

numerous safety features, it is advisable

to proceed as follows every time the

vehicle is not in use for a long period or

moved in an emergency as a result of a

breakdown or accident:

unscrew the fixing devices 1 fig. 70,

then remove the cover 2;

close the LPG cock rotating the ring

3 fig. 71 clockwise;

refit the cover and retighten the

fastening devices.

IMPORTANT If gas is smelt, switch from

LPG operation to petrol operation and

immediately go to the Fiat Dealership to

have the vehicle checked and possible

system faults excluded.

PGL00002

PGL00003

SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

1. LPG tank – 2. Multivalve stack and safety devices – 3. LPG refuelling filler – 4. LPG pipes – 5. LPG injection system ECU –

LPG injectors – 7. Gaseous LPG filter – 8. Pressure regulator – 9. LPG/petrol switch and LPG level gauge – 10. Petrol tank

PLG00004

KNOWING YOUR CAR

LPG TANK

The car has a pressurised tank for

storing LPG in a liquid state. It is

toroidal and is located in the spare

wheel compartment with suitable

protection.

LPG tank certification

The LPG tank is certified in accordance

with the regulations in force.

In Italy, the tank has a life of 10 years

starting from the car registration date. If

the vehicle has been registered in a

country other than Italy, the duration

and the testing/inspection procedures

of the LPG tank can vary depending on

the national provisions in force in that

country. In all case, when the time limit

for your country has expired, go to a

Fiat Dealer to have the tank replaced.

SOLENOID VALVES AND

SAFETY DEVICES

The system has a solenoid valve

located on the pressure reduction unit

and a solenoid valve fitted inside the

multivalve stack on the tank.

The main function of these solenoid

valves is to interrupt/allow the flow of

LPG to the supply circuit.

The solenoid valves are open when:

a request to run on LPG has been

made;

the optimum engine running

conditions are satisfied (engine coolant

temperature, minimum revs level) for

running on LPG;

there is enough LPG in the tank for

operation.

The multivalve stack fitted on the tank

includes:

a valve that automatically stops the

supply of LPG when the maximum

permitted filling level is reached (80% of

the total tank capacity);

a flow limiter which, if a piping is

broken, prevents the complete and

sudden escape of LPG;

a check valve preventing LPG

back-flow to the filler;

a safety solenoid valve on the LPG

supply line for enabling or preventing

the flow of gas towards the pressure

reducer;

a manual valve, positioned upstream

of the solenoid valve for bypassing the

LPG system for servicing operations;

a melting pad which, in the case of

overheating (temperature above

120°C), totally eliminates the danger of

excess pressure, releasing the LPG in

the tank to the outside as quickly as

possible in a controlled manner;

an analogue level gauge for LPG in

the tank.

PIPES

The piping for the LPG in a liquid state

(from the filler to the tank and from the

tank to the pressure regulator) is made

from copper coated in plastic.

The supply piping for the LPG in a

gaseous state (from the pressure

regulator to the LPG injectors) are made

from rubber.

REGULATION UNIT

The regulation unit (see the figure)

includes:

cut-out solenoid valve with gauze

filter;

pressure regulator.

The cut-out solenoid valve opens or

closes together with the solenoid valve

on the tank. It closes all LPG flow when

the engine is not running on gas. It also

acts as a safety device that prevents

PLG00006

the LPG flow if the fuel locking inertia

switch is activated.

the pressure regulator allows the

LPG to pass from a liquid state to a

gaseous state through an expansion

chamber and maintains the pressure

required for the operation of the system

at a preset value.

LPG FILTER

The filter, located on the pressure

regulator outlet pipe fig. 74 filters the

gaseous LPG during the LPG injector

supply stage.

LPG INJECTORS

There are four injectors specifically for

LPG on a dedicated bracket on the

cylinder head and connected, via

specific pipes, to the individual intake

ducts fig. 75.

They are supplied with LPG in a

gaseous state at a constant pressure

and are controlled by a specific

electronic control unit.

A gas pressure and temperature sensor

that sends an appropriate electrical

signal in order to determine the LPG

injection time is fitted on the injectors.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL

UNIT

The car has a special electronic control

unit fig. 76, in the engine compartment,

controlling the LPG supply, using the

sensors located on the car.

The control unit for the injectors has the

same strategy as the petrol control unit

(timed sequential Multipoint).

LPG/PETROL SWITCH

This engine normally runs on LPG

except during starting when it runs on

petrol. Switching to LPG is automatic,

the warning light

1 fig. 77 on the

instrument panel, switches off.

If you specifically want to use petrol,

press the button on the dashboard

fig. 78. If the LED located above the

button turns on, it indicates that

PGL00007

PLG00008

PLG00009

PGL00022

KNOWING YOUR CAR

switching has taken place correctly.

Regardless of the last fuel system used,

at the following engine starting, after the

initial petrol stage, the system will

automatically switch to LPG.

The bars 2 fig. 79 on the display

indicate the level of LPG in the tank.

To guarantee switching in full safety, the

actual change to the chosen fuel

system takes place depending on the

car usage conditions; it may not

therefore be immediate. Switching is

confirmed by the switching on/off of the

green warning light

on the

instrument panel.

When switching is requested, metallic

noise from the valves which pressurise

the circuit can be heard. For the

switching logic described above, a

delay between the valve ticking and the

switching off of the instrument panel

indication is completely normal.

Moreover, when starting with outside

temperatures below about -10°C, the

switching times from petrol to LPG

increase to allow the pressure

regulator/reduction unit to heat up.

To change fuel type, press the

fig. 78 button on the dashboard with

the car stationary and engine running,

or while driving.

16) 17)

LPG FUEL RESERVE

When the residual quantity of LPG

drops below 1/5 of the tank capacity:

the first bar on the display 1

fig. 80 remains on;

the yellow warning light 2onthe

instrument panel turns on;

an acoustic signal is emitted.

This condition will last until the next

LPG refuelling, also in the event of

petrol operation.

If the LPG runs out, the system

automatically switches to petrol and the

1 fig. 77 warning light on the

dashboard turns on.

SYSTEM FAILURE SIGNALLING

In the event of an LPG system failure,

the

symbol will be displayed and all

the level bars will turn off.

In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership

as soon as possible, running on petrol.

PGL00001

PGL00023

PGL00024

REFUELLING

18) 19)

LPG

Maximum refuelling capacity (including

reserve): 42 litres. The figure already

takes into account the 80% tank filling

limit and the residual fluid required for

priming; this figure represents the

maximum permitted capacity. In

addition, after different refuelling

processes, this figure may vary due to

differences between the network pump

supply pressures, pumps having

different supply/locking features, tank

not completely run out of fuel.

IMPORTANT In order to avoid

inconsistent information by the LPG

gauge on the instrument panel, it is

recommended to refill with at least

10 litres each time.

WARNING

32) Note that in some countries (including

Italy) there are legal restrictions in force for

parking/garaging motor vehicles fuelled by

gas that is denser than air; LPG comes

under this category.

33) If gas is smelt, switch from LPG

operation to petrol operation and

immediately go to a Fiat Dealership to have

the vehicle checked and possible system

faults excluded.

IMPORTANT

12) The car is equipped with a gaseous

LPG injection system designed specifically

for it: it is therefore absolutely forbidden to

alter the configuration of the system or its

components. The use of other components

or materials could cause malfunctions and

lead to a reduction in safety; therefore, in

the case of problems, contact a Fiat

Dealership. To prevent damage to the gas

system parts when towing or raising the

vehicle, follow the instructions in the

"Towing the vehicle" paragraph of the

Owner Handbook.

13) The system operates at temperatures

ranging between −20°C and 100°C.

14) When painting in an oven, the LPG tank

must be removed from the car and later

refitted by a Fiat Dealership. Although the

LPG system has numerous safety features,

it is advisable to proceed as follows every

time the vehicle is not in use for a long

period or moved in an emergency as a

result of a breakdown or accident: unscrew

the devices fastening the cover of the LPG

tank, then remove it. Close the LPG cock

rotating the ring nut clockwise (see

"Passive safety / active safety"). Refit the

cover and retighten the fastening devices.

15) When switching is requested, metallic

noise from the valves which pressurise the

circuit can be heard. For the switching logic

described above, a delay between the

valve ticking and the switching off of the

instrument panel indication is completely

normal.

16) Do not switch between the two

operating modes whilst starting the engine.

17) In particular usage conditions, such as

starting and operation at low ambient

temperature or LPG supply with low

propane content, the system may switch

temporarily to petrol operation, without a

visual indication of switching on the

instrument panel. In the event of low LPG

levels in the tank or request for high

performance (e.g. overtaking, car fully

laden, steep hills) the system may

automatically switch to petrol operation to

guarantee the engine power requested; the

green warning light

on the instrument

panel switches on to indicate this. When

the above conditions are no longer present,

the system automatically restores LPG

operation; the green warning light

switches off. To achieve the automatic

switching described above, make sure that

there is always enough fuel in the petrol

tank.

18) It is strictly forbidden to use any

additive in the LPG. Periodically (at least

once every six months) it is advisable to let

the LPG in the tank run out and, at the first

refuelling, to check that it does not exceed

the maximum capacity of 42 litres (reserve

included) (with a tolerance of 1 litres

excess). If the level is above 42 litres

(reserve included) contact a Fiat Dealership

immediately.

19) Only use LPG for motor vehicles.

KNOWING YOUR CAR

ACTIVE GRILLE

SHUTTER

(where provided)

Your vehicle may be equipped with

Active Grille Shutter, an automatic

system with mobile flaps applied in front

of the cooling module, whose

automatic opening/closing movement

aims at improving the vehicle

aerodynamic efficiency and thus

reducing consumption while ensuring

optimal engine operating temperature

conditions.

When a greater air flow is required for

cooling (e.g. when driving in urban

traffic), the flaps open, whereas when

temperature is low or the air flow is

enough (for example when driving in

motorways), the grille closes.

In case of failure, the instrument panel

will show the warning light

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section of the handbook gives you

all the information you need to

understand, interpret and use the

instrument panel correctly.

CONTROL PANEL AND ON-BOARD

INSTRUMENTS ..............51

DISPLAY ..................54

TRIP COMPUTER.............58

WARNING LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES ................59

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND ON-BOARD INSTRUMENTS

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

1. Speedometer (speed indicator) 2. Fuel level digital gauge with reserve warning light 3. Display 4. Digital engine coolant

temperature gauge with overheating warning light 5. Rev counter.

Warning light present on Diesel versions only.

IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

P2000030-000-000

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL RECONFIGURABLE DISPLAY — LPG VERSION

1. Speedometer (speed indicator) 2. Petrol level digital gauge with reserve warning light 3. Display 4. LPG level digital

gauge with reserve warning light 5. Rev counter.

IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

PGL00020

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

MULTI-FUNCTIONAL RECONFIGURABLE DISPLAY — Right hand drive version

1. Speedometer (speed indicator) 2. Fuel level digital gauge with reserve warning light 3. Display 4. Digital engine coolant

temperature gauge with overheating warning light 5. Rev counter.

Warning light present on Diesel versions only.

IMPORTANT The illumination of the instrument panel graphics may vary according to version.

PDX00002H

DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION

The vehicle is equipped with a display

that can show useful information to the

driver while driving.

With the ignition device in STOP

position and ignition key removed, the

display lights up and shows the time

and total odometer reading (in km or

miles) for a few seconds when a door is

opened/closed.

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR

The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system

advises the driver to change gear

through a special indication on the

display.

Through the GSI, the driver is informed

that the gear change will allow a

reduction in fuel consumption.

When the

symbol appears on the

display, the GSI suggests switching to a

higher gear, while when the

symbol

is displayed, the GSI suggests

changing to a lower gear.

The indication in the display remains

until a gear is shifted or the driving

conditions go back to a situation where

gearshifting is not required to improve

consumption.

RECONFIGURABLE

MULTIFUNCTION

DISPLAY

The display fig. 84 will show the

following information:

1: headlight alignment position,

indication of the gear engaged,

indication of the gear change

suggestion (GSI), outside temperature,

compass (where present), date.

2: vehicle speed, warning

messages/any failure indications

3: total kilometres (or miles) run and

symbols of any failure indications.

CONTROL BUTTONS

These are located on the left side of the

steering wheel fig. 85.

They allow the driver to select and

interact with the items in the Main menu

of the display (see paragraph "Main

menu").

/ : press and release the

buttons to access the Main menu and

to scroll the menu and the submenus

upwards or downwards.

/ : press and release the

buttons to access the information

displays or the submenus of an item of

the Main menu.

OK: press this button to

access/select the info displays or the

submenus of an item of the Main menu.

Hold the button pressed for 1 second

P2000078-000-000

05036J0004EM

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

to reset the displayed/selected

functions.

MAIN MENU

The Main menu comprises a series of

items which can be selected using the

control buttons to access the different

selection and setting options given in

the following paragraphs.

REMARKS

Some options have a submenu.

With the Uconnect™ 5" or 7" HD

system, some Menu items are shown

and managed on the display of the

latter and not on the instrument panel

display (refer to the dedicated

Multimedia chapter or to the

supplement available online).

MENU OPTIONS

The Menu includes the following items:

TRIP

GSI

VEHICLE INFO

DRIVER ASSIST

AUDIO (function available in versions

and markets where present)

PHONE (function available in versions

and markets where present)

NAVIGATION (function available in

versions and markets where present)

ALERTS

VEHICLE SETTINGS

Trip

This menu item displays the information

on the "Trip computer" (for further

information, see the description of the

"Trip computer" paragraph in this

chapter).

The information shown on the display is

as follows:

Instant info: distance (km or miles),

instantaneous consumption (mpg,

l/100 km or km/l);

Trip A: distance A (km or miles), trip

time A (hours/minutes/seconds),

average consumption A (mpg, or

l/100 km or km/l), average speed A

(km/h or mph);

Trip B: distance B (km or miles),

average consumption B (mpg, or

l/100 km or km/l), trip time B

(hours/minutes/seconds), average

speed B (km/h or mph).

Speedometer: km or miles displayed.

By pressing the OK button with

speedometer display active, you can

change the measurement unit (km/h

or mph). On leaving this screen, the

measurement unit set will take effect.

GSI

This menu item makes it possible to

see the gear shift indicator provided by

the GSI (gear shift indicator) system on

the display.

Vehicle info

This menu item displays the information

on the vehicle conditions.

Press the

or button to select the

items listed below.

Tyre pressure: information displayed on

the iTPMS (where provided) (for further

information, see the description in

paragraph "Auxiliary driving systems" in

the "Safety" chapter).

Engine oil temperature: engine oil

temperature displayed.

Change engine oil: indication for engine

oil change.

Battery voltage: display of the battery

voltage value (charge level).

Service (Scheduled servicing): Number

of kilometres (or miles) and days until

the next Scheduled Servicing operation.

WARNING

The “Scheduled Servicing Plan”

includes vehicle maintenance at fixed

intervals (refer to the "Maintenance and

care" chapter).

This is displayed automatically, with

ignition device at MAR, 2000 km before

servicing or, where provided, 30 days

before servicing. It is also displayed

each time the ignition device is turned

to MAR or, for some versions, every

200 km. Below this threshold servicing

indications are more frequent. The

display will be in km or miles according

to the unit of measurement set.

When the following scheduled servicing

is approaching ("coupon"), the word

"Service" will be displayed, followed by

the number of kilometres/miles or days

left, when the ignition device is turned

to MAR. Go to a Fiat Dealership, where

the "Scheduled Servicing Plan"

operations will be performed and the

message will be reset.

Driver Assist

This menu item allows you to view and

change the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) settings on the instrument panel

display.

Audio

(function available in versions and

markets where present)

This Menu item allows some

information displayed on the

Uconnect™ system to be repeated on

the instrument panel display (for further

information see the dedicated chapter).

Phone

(function available in versions and

markets where present)

This Menu item allows some

information displayed on the

Uconnect™ system to be repeated on

the instrument panel display (for further

information see the dedicated chapter).

The information displayed includes the

mobile pairing condition (mobile paired

or not paired), active/incoming/on hold

calls and the management of double

calls (first incoming, second on hold,

etc.).

In the phone menu, you can also select

3 sub-menus “SMS reader”, “recent

calls” and “favourite numbers” (available

with the Uconnect™7'' HD system),

which can be selected with the arrows

or . This menu can also be used

to select and manage the last 10 calls

or the last 10 SMS using the directional

buttons on the steering wheel.

Navigation

(function available in versions and

markets where present)

This Menu item allows some

information displayed on the

Uconnect™ 5" o 7" HD system to be

shown on the instrument panel display

(for further information see the

dedicated chapter).

Alerts

This menu item displays information/

failure messages stored by the system.

Vehicle Settings

This menu item allows you to change

the settings for:

Display;

Units;

Clock & Date;

Security;

Safety & Assistance;

Lights;

Doors & Locks.

Display

By selecting item "Display" you can

access the following settings:

Display Settings (changing

instrument panel display settings): this

menu item makes it possible to change

the displaying of the information, for

example the Compass (where present),

Outside temperature, Date (day/month),

Time (hours/minutes), Audio information

(where present). Selecting “Reset of the

default settings” makes it possible to

reset and restore the default settings;

Language: allows you to select the

language for showing the

information/warnings;

See phone: used to activate/

deactivate the display of pop-ups on

the instrument panel when there are

incoming calls, outgoing calls, on hold

calls, audio conference and incoming

SMS (available in versions and markets

where present);

See navigation: allows you to display

the information about the Navigation

mode on the instrument panel (available

in versions and markets where present);

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Automatic Trip B reset: allows you to

set the reset options for Trip B;

Display brightness: this function is

used to set the brightness level

(8 levels) for the display and all the other

backlit components. The display

brightness can be adjusted in all

environmental conditions, whereas all

the other components (e.g. climate

control, radio, dashboard, buttons, etc.)

can only be adjusted at night or when

the dipped headlights are on. To set the

brightness, briefly press the OK button,

the display will show the previously set

brightness “level”; then press the

button to adjust. To return to the

previous screen, briefly press the

button.

Units

Selecting the item "Units" you can

choose the unit of measurement to be

used for displaying the various values.

The possible options are:

Imperial

Metric

Customised

Clock & Date

Select item "Clock & Date" to adjust the

clock.

The possible options are:

Set time: hours/minutes adjustment;

Time format: adjustment of the time

format "12h" (12-hour) or "24h"

(24-hour);

Set date: adjustment of

day/month/year.

Security

Select item "Security" to make the

following adjustments:

Passenger AIR BAG: passenger side

airbag activation/deactivation “Off” (to

deactivate) or “On” (to activate).

Passenger's protection not active:

the

LED comes on constantly in the

instrument panel dashboard;

Speed beep: setting of the vehicle

speed limit (km/h or mph). When this is

exceeded, the driver is notified through

an acoustic and visual signal;

Seat belt buzzer: this function can be

only displayed after a Fiat Dealership

has deactivated the SBR system (see

the "SBR system" paragraph in the

"Security" chapter).

Safety & Assistance

Select item "Safety & Assistance" to

make the following adjustments:

Rain sensor: activation/deactivation

of the automatic switching on of the

wipers in the case of rain;

Buzzer volume: selection of the

volume of the buzzer that accompanies

the display of the failure/warning;

Brake Control: selection of the

intervention mode for the Full Brake

Control system;

“Brake C.Sensitivity": selection of the

"readiness" of the Full Brake Control

system to intervene, on the basis of the

distance from the obstacle;

Park Assist: selection of the type of

warning provided by the Park Assist

system;

Park Assist Vol.: selection of the

volume of the acoustic warnings

provided by the Park Assist system.

Lights

Select item "Lights" to make the

following adjustments:

Courtesy lights: interior light

brightness selection;

Daytime running lights:

activation/deactivation of the daytime

running lights;

Cornering lights: activation/

deactivation of cornering lights (where

provided);

Headlamp sensor: adjustment of

headlight activation sensitivity;

Follow me home: setting of the

headlight deactivation delay after

switching off the engine.

Doors & Locks

Select item "Doors & Locks" to make

the following adjustments:

Autoclose: activation/deactivation of

automatic door locking when the

vehicle is moving;

Flash Lights w/Lock: activation of the

direction indicator flashing at door

locking;

Auto Unlock on Exit: automatic

unlocking of the doors when exiting the

vehicle.

TRIP COMPUTER

The "Trip computer" is used to display

information on vehicle operation when

the ignition device is at MAR.

This function has two separate

memories, called “Trip A” and “Trip B”,

where the trip data are recorded

separately from each other.

Both memories can be reset.

“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display

the values relating to:

Autonomy

Instant consumption

Distance (distance travelled)

Average fuel consumption

Average speed

Trip time (driving time)

NOTE The displayed data can change

based on the vehicle version.

To reset the values, press and hold

down the OK button on the steering

wheel fig. 86.

NOTE “Range” and “Instantaneous fuel

consumption" parameters cannot be

reset.

05036J0004EM

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

IMPORTANT The warning light switches on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal

when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or

alternative to the information contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always

refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure indication.

IMPORTANT Failure indications displayed are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures. Serious faults

are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter

duration. The display cycle of both categories can be interrupted. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause

of the failure is eliminated.

NOTE The warning lights and symbols described below are indicative and can change based on the version or market.

Warning light What it means

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID / PARKING BRAKE ON

Low brake fluid level

The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level,

possibly due to a leak in the circuit. Restore the brake fluid level, then check that the warning light has

switched off. If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership.

Parking brake on

The warning light switches on when the parking brake is engaged.

POWER STEERING FAILURE

This warning light (or symbol in the display) switches on when the ignition device is brought to MAR, but it

should switch off after a few seconds. If the war ning light (or symbol on the display) remains on, you

could not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be

increased; steering is, however, possible. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

EBD FAILURE

The simultaneous switching on of the

(red) and (amber) warning lights with the engine on

indicates either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear

wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking sharply.

Drive very carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the system inspected immediately.

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED

The warning light switches on constantly if the vehicle is stationary and the driver side or passenger side

seat belt (for versions/markets, where provided), with the passenger seated, is not fastened. The warning

light flashes and a buzzer will sound if the vehicle is in motion and the driver side or passenger side seat

belt (for versions/markets, where provided), with the passenger seated, is not correctly fastened. In this

case, fasten the seat belt.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning light What it means

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH

The warning light on the display lights up when the engine has overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch off the engine and check that the coolant level in the

reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and

carefully open the cap, top up with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks

on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. If, when restarting, the warning light on the

display switches on again, contact a Fiat Dealership;

If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down

and, if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running

and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then tur n the engine off. Check that the

coolant level is correct as described above.

IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is advisable to keep the engine running and slightly accelerated

for a few minutes before turning it off.

AIRBAG FAILURE

If the warning light switches on constantly, this indicates a failure in the airbag system.

34) 35)

WARNING

34) If, when the ignition device is turned to MAR, the warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving, a failure may have

occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases,

they may be deployed accidentally. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked.

35) The failure of the

warning light is signalled by the lighting up of the symbol on the instrument panel display (or, for versions where

provided, by the flashing of the generic failure warning light). In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint

systems. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked

Warning light What it means

iTPMS

iTPMS failure/iTPMS temporarily deactivated

The warning light flashes for about 75 seconds and then stays on constantly (together with a message on

the display) to indicate that the system is temporarily deactivated or faulty. The system will go back to

normal operation when the operating conditions will allow it. If this is not the case, carry out the “Reset”

procedure after restoring the normal operating conditions.

If the malfunction warning persists, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Tyre pressure low

The warning light switches on constantly to indicate that the pressure of one or more tyres is lower than

the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tyre duration

and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. It is advisable to restore the correct pressure value (see the

"Wheels" paragraph in the "Technical specifications" section). Once the normal operating conditions of

the vehicle are restored, carry out the "Reset" procedure.

WARNING Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as the car handling may be compromised.

Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering.

ABS FAILURE

The warning light switches on to indicate an ABS fault. In this case the braking system maintains its

efficiency unaltered but without the advantage of the ABS system. Drive carefully and contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

ESC SYSTEM

ESC system activation

Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the warning light: it indicates that the car is in

critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC system failure

If the warning light does not switch off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found on the

ESC system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Hill Hold Control system failure

The warning light turns on to indicate a Hill Holder Control system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon

as possible.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning light What it means

PARTIAL DEACTIVATION OF ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS

The warning light switches on to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially deactivated.

When the systems are reactivated, the warning light switches off.

REAR FOG LIGHT

The warning light switches on when the rear fog light is activated.

INJECTION / EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE

In normal conditions, when the ignition device is brought to MAR, the warning light switches on, but it

should switch off as soon as the engine is started. The operation of the warning light may be checked by

the traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws and regulations of the country where you

are driving.

20)

Injection system failure

If the warning light remains on, or it switches on whilst driving, the injection system is not working

properly. The warning light on constantly signals a malfunction in the supply/ignition system which could

cause high exhaust emissions, a possible loss of performance, poor driveability and high consumption.

The warning light switches off if the malfunction disappears, but is still stored by the system. Under these

conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling at moderate speed but without demanding excessive effort

from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on may cause damage.

Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Catalytic converter damaged

If the warning light flashes, it means that the catalytic converter may be damaged. Release the

accelerator pedal to lower the speed of the engine until the warning light stops flashing. Continue the

journey at moderate speed, trying to avoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact

a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

IMPORTANT

20) If, turning the ignition device to MAR, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some

versions together with the message on the display), contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Warning light What it means

GLOW PLUG PREHEATING (Diesel versions)

This warning light comes on when the ignition device is brought to MAR and will switch off when the glow

plugs have reached the preset temperature. The engine can be started as soon as the warning light

switches off.

IMPORTANT In mild or high temperature conditions, the warning light comes on for a very short time only.

GLOW PLUG PREHEATING FAILURE (Diesel versions)

The warning light will flash to indicate a failure in the glow plug preheating system. In this case, contact a

Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE

This warning light on the display comes on when about 5 to 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank.

21)

LPG RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE

(for LPG versions only)

This warning light on the display comes on when about 8 litres of LPG are left in the tank. An acoustic

warning goes on and the first notch of the LPG indicator stays on.

FULL BRAKE CONTROL OFF

The warning light comes on when the Full Brake Control system is deactivated by the driver or in the

event of automatic deactivation following a temporary system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon

as possible.

START&STOP SYSTEM MANUAL ACTIVATION / DEACTIVATION

(for versions/markets, where provided)

Activation: A message will appear, where provided, on the display when the system is activated.

Deactivation: A warning light and, where provided, a dedicated message will appear on the display

when the Start&Stop system is deactivated.

IMPORTANT

21) If the warning light (or the symbol on the display) flashes whilst driving, contact a Fiat Dealership.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Warning light What it means

“DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM ACTIVATION

The indication CITY switches on when the "Dualdrive" electric power steering system is activated by

pressing the relative control button. If the button is pressed again the word CITY goes out.

PETROL SWITCHOVER

(for LPG versions only)

The warning light turns on when the engine is petrol fuelled.

SIDE LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The warning light switches on when the side lights or dipped headlights are turned on.

This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition device was

placed in STOP position ("Follow me home" function).

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

The warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on.

LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR

The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved downwards or, together

with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR

The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved upwards or, together

with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

The warning light switches on when the main beam headlights are turned on.

SYMBOLS ON THE DISPLAY

Symbol What it means

DOOR OPEN

The symbol switches on when one or more doors are not completely shut (for versions/

markets, where provided). An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the car

moving. Close the doors properly.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE

If this symbol switches on when the engine is running, this indicates a vehicle recharging

system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

BONNET NOT PROPERLY SHUT

The symbol switches on when the engine bonnet is not properly shut (for versions/markets,

where provided). Close the bonnet properly.

TAILGATE NOT PROPERLY SHUT

The symbol switches on when the tailgate is not properly shut (for versions/markets, where

provided). Close the tailgate correctly.

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

The symbol switches on in the case of insufficient engine oil pressure.

22)

IMPORTANT Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The switching on of the

symbol does not show the quantity of oil in the engine: the oil level must be checked manually.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on constantly together with the message in the display in the case of

engine oil pressure sensor failure.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What it means

ENGINE OIL DETERIORATED

(where provided)

Diesel versions: the symbol turns on and is displayed for 3 minute cycles and intervals of

5 seconds until the oil is changed.

The symbol is displayed until the problem is solved.

Petrol versions: the symbol switches on and then is not displayed when the display cycle is

completed.

IMPORTANT After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue

to switch on as described above until the oil is changed.

If the symbol flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply

reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle.

The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing

the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

23) 24)

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the rain sensor. Contact a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATION

The symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off system intervention.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to the description in the "Fuel cut-off system"

section in the "In an emergency" chapter. If it is still not possible to restore the fuel supply,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the event of fuel cut-off system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible.

WATER IN DIESEL FILTER (Diesel versions)

The symbol switches on constantly when driving (along with a message in the display), to

indicate the presence of water in the diesel filter.

25)

START&STOP SYSTEM FAILURE

(for versions/markets, where provided)

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the Start&Stop system. The display will show a

dedicated message. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

Symbol What it means

FIAT CODE SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on to indicate a failure of the Fiat CODE system. Contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE

The symbol switches on to indicate a failure on the following lights: daytime running lights

(DRLs); parking lights; side lights; direction indicators; rear fog light; reversing light; number

plate lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse or an interruption of the

electrical connection.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the event of fuel level sensor failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

LPG FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the event of LPG fuel level sensor failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD

The symbol turns on when the outside temperature falls to or below 3°C.

IMPORTANT In the event of outside temperature sensor failure, the digits that indicate the

value are replaced by dashes.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE

The symbol switches on along with a message on the display in the event of dusk sensor

failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbol switches on to report a failure of the audio system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as

soon as possible.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What it means

DPF CLEANING in progress (Diesel versions with DPF only)

The symbol switches on constantly to indicate that the DPF system needs to eliminate the

trapped pollutants (particulate) through the regeneration process.

The symbol does not switch on during every DPF regeneration, but only when driving

conditions require that the driver is notified. To turn off the symbol, keep the vehicle in motion

until the regeneration process is over. On average, the process lasts 15 minutes. Optimal

conditions for completing the process are achieved by travelling at 60 km/h with engine speed

above 2000 rpm.

When this symbol switches on, it does not indicate a vehicle failure and thus it should not be

taken to a workshop.

26)

PARKING SENSOR FAILURE (PARK ASSIST)

The yellow symbol switches on in the case of temporary failure of the parking sensors. If the

problem is still present after cleaning the parking sensor area, contact a Fiat Dealership.

The red symbol switches on in the case of permanent failure of the parking sensors. The failed

operation of the system might be due to the insufficient voltage from the battery or other

failures on the electrical system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE

The symbols switch on (with the displayed message) in the case of failure of the Full Brake

Control system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

SPEED LIMITER FAILURE

The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the Speed Limiter device. Contact a Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE

The symbol appears along with a message on the display in case of an Adaptive Cruise

Control system failure. In this case, contact the Fiat Service Network as soon as possible.

Symbol What it means

SCHEDULED SERVICING (SERVICE)

The “Scheduled Servicing Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at fixed intervals (refer to the

"Maintenance and care" chapter).

When the next scheduled service is approaching, the symbol will be displayed, followed by the

number of kilometres/miles or days (where provided) left, when the ignition device is turned to

MAR.

This is displayed automatically, with ignition device at MAR, 2000 km before servicing or,

where provided, 30 days before servicing. It is also displayed each time the ignition device is

turned to MAR. The display will be in km or miles according to the unit of measurement set.

Go to a Fiat Dealership, where the "Scheduled Servicing Plan" operations will be performed

and the message will be reset.

This symbol turns on to indicate that the clutch pedal must be pressed to enable starting.

The switching on of this symbol suggests shifting to a higher or lower gear.

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

The (white) symbol switches on when the speed limit (e.g. 110 km/h) set through the menu of

the display is exceeded (the inner value updates according to the set speed).

For versions/markets, where provided, the (red) symbol switches on when the speed limit set

through the menu of the display is exceeded: for these versions the value is set to 120.

START&STOP SYSTEM ACTIVATION

(for versions/markets, where provided)

The symbol turns on to indicate that the engine has been stopped by the START&STOP

system.

HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT

The headlight alignment corrector operates with ignition device at MAR and dipped headlights

on. Press

and on the control panel.

KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

Symbol What it means

ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL

The symbol switches on if the electronic Cruise Control is activated.

IMPORTANT

22) If the symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.

23) Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the

symbol switches on, and never more than 500 km after it

first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the warranty. Remember that when

this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

24) If the symbol flashes when driving, contact a Fiat Dealership.

25) The presence of water in the fuel system circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine operation. If the

symbol is displayed contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to bleed the system. If the above indications come on immediately after

refuelling, water has probably been poured into the tank: switch the engine off immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.

26) Vehicle travel speed should always be adapted to the traffic and weather conditions, and must always comply with traffic regulations. The

engine can be stopped even if the DPF symbol is on: however, repeated interruptions of the regeneration process could cause premature

deterioration of the engine oil. For this reason it is always advisable to wait for the symbol to go off before turning off the engine, following the

instructions above. Do not complete the DPF regeneration process when the vehicle is stopped.

SAFETY

The chapter that you are about to read

is very important: it describes the safety

systems with which the vehicle is

equipped and provides instructions on

how to use them correctly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ......73

DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS . .76

OCCUPANT PROTECTION

SYSTEMS .................83

SEATBELTS................83

SBR (SEAT BELT REMINDER)

SYSTEM ..................85

PRE-TENSIONERS ............86

CHILD PROTECTION SYSTEMS . . .88

SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG .......101

SAFETY

ACTIVE SAFETY

SYSTEMS

The vehicle has the following active

safety systems:

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System);

DTC (Drag Torque Control);

ESC (Electronic Stability Control);

TC (Traction Control);

PBA (Panic Brake Assist);

HHC (Hill Hold Control);

ERM (Electronic Rollover Mitigation);

TSC (Trailer Sway Control).

For the operation of the systems, see

the following description.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking

System)

This system, which is an integral part of

the braking system, prevents one or

more wheels from locking and slipping

in all road surface conditions,

irrespective of the intensity of the

braking action, ensuring that the vehicle

can be controlled even during

emergency braking and optimising

stopping distances.

The system intervenes during braking

when the wheels are about to lock,

typically in emergency braking or

low-grip conditions, when locking may

be more frequent.

The system also improves control and

stability of the vehicle when braking on

a surface where the grip of the left and

right wheels varies, or on corners.

The Electronic Braking Force

Distribution (EBD) system completes

the system allowing the brake force to

be distributed between the front and

rear wheels.

System intervention

The driver can feel that the ABS system

has come into action because the

brake pedal pulsates slightly and the

system gets noisier: this is entirely

normal with the system operating.

36) 37) 38) 39) 39) 41) 42)

DTC (Drag Torque

Control) SYSTEM

The system prevents the drive wheels

from possibly locking, which could

happen, for example, if the accelerator

pedal is released suddenly or in the

case of a sudden downshifting in

conditions of poor grip. In this

conditions, the engine braking effect

could cause the drive wheels to slip,

resulting in a loss of vehicle stability. In

these situations, the DTC system

intervenes, restoring torque to the

engine in order to conserve vehicle

stability and increase vehicle safety.

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) SYSTEM

The ESC system improves the

directional control and stability of the

car in various driving conditions.

The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s

understeer and oversteer, distributing

the brake force on the wheels

appropriately. The torque supplied by

the engine can also be reduced in order

to maintain control of the vehicle.

The ESC system uses sensors installed

on the vehicle to determine the

trajectory that the driver intends to

follow and compares it with the

vehicle’s effective trajectory. When the

real trajectory deviates from the desired

trajectory, the ESC system intervenes to

counter the vehicle’s understeer or

oversteer.

Oversteer: occurs when the car is

turning more than it should according

to the angle of the steering wheel.

Understeer: occurs when the vehicle

is turning less than it should according

to the angle of the steering wheel.

System intervention

The intervention of the system is

indicated by the flashing of the

warning light on the instrument

panel, to inform the driver that the

vehicle is in critical stability and grip

conditions.

43) 44) 45) 46) 47)

TC (Traction Control)

SYSTEM

The system automatically operates in

the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet

roads (aquaplaning) and acceleration on

slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. on

one or more drive wheels. Depending

on the slipping conditions, two different

control systems are activated:

if the slipping involves both drive

wheels, the system intervenes, reducing

the power transmitted by the engine;

if the slipping only involves one of the

drive wheels, the BLD (Brake Limited

Differential) function is activated,

automatically braking the wheel which

is slipping (the behaviour of a

self-locking differential is simulated).

This will increase the engine torque

transferred to the wheel which isn't

slipping. This function remains active

even if the "Systems partially disabled"

and "Systems disabled" modes are

selected (see description in the

following pages).

System intervention

The intervention of the system is

indicated by the flashing of the

warning light on the instrument

panel, to inform the driver that the

vehicle is in critical stability and grip

conditions.

48) 49) 50) 51) 52)

PBA (Panic Brake

Assist) SYSTEM

The PBA system is designed to improve

the vehicle’s braking capacity during

emergency braking.

The system detects emergency braking

by monitoring the speed and force with

which the brake pedal is pressed, and

consequently applies the optimal brake

pressure. This can reduce the braking

distance: the PBA system therefore

completes the ABS.

Maximum assistance from the PBA

system is obtained by pressing the

brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the

brake pedal should be pressed

continuously during braking, avoiding

intermittent presses, to get the most

out of the system. Do not reduce

pressure on the brake pedal until

braking is no longer necessary.

The PBA system is deactivated when

the brake pedal is released.

54) 54) 55)

HHC (Hill Hold Control)

SYSTEM

This is an integral part of the ESC

system and facilitates starting on

slopes, activating automatically in the

following cases:

uphill: vehicle stationary on a road

with a gradient higher than 5%, engine

running, brake pressed and

transmission in neutral or gear other

than reverse engaged;

downhill: vehicle stationary on a road

with a gradient higher than 5%, engine

running, brake pressed and reverse

gear engaged.

When setting off, the ESC system

control unit maintains the braking

pressure on the wheels until the engine

torque necessary for starting is

reached, or in any case for a maximum

of 2 seconds, allowing your right foot to

be moved easily from the brake pedal

to the accelerator.

When two seconds have elapsed,

without starting, the system is

automatically deactivated, gradually

releasing the braking pressure. During

this release stage it is possible to hear a

typical mechanical brake release noise,

indicating the imminent movement of

the car.

56) 57)

ERM (Electronic Rollover

Mitigation) SYSTEM

The system monitors the tendency of

the wheels to rise from the ground if the

driver performs extreme manoeuvres

like quick steering to avoid an obstacle,

especially in poor road conditions.

SAFETY

If these conditions occur, the warning

light

flashes on the instrument panel

and the system, intervening on the

brakes and engine power, limits the

possibility that the wheels are raised

from the ground. It is not possible to

avoid tendency to roll over if the

phenomenon is due to reasons such as

driving on high side gradients, collision

with objects or other vehicles.

58)

TSC (Trailer Sway

Control) SYSTEM

The system employs a series of sensors

located on the vehicle to identify

excessive swerving of the trailer and

take the necessary precautions to

eliminate it.

To counteract the effect of trailer sway,

the system can reduce the engine

power and intervene on the wheels

involved. The TSC system activates

automatically once excessive sway of

the trailer is detected.

System intervention

When the system is active, the

warning light flashes on the

instrument panel, the engine power is

reduced and braking can be felt on the

individual wheels, following the attempt

to eliminate the swerving of the trailer.

59) 60)

WARNING

36) When the ABS intervenes and you feel

the brake pedal pulsating, do not reduce

the pressure, but hold it down firmly and

confidently; in doing so you will brake in the

shortest distance possible, depending on

the current road conditions.

37) To obtain the maximum efficiency of

the braking system, a bedding-in period of

about 500 km is needed: during this period

it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and

prolonged braking.

38) If the ABS intervenes, this indicates

that the grip of the tyres on the road is

nearing its limit: you must slow down to a

speed compatible with the available grip.

39) The ABS cannot overrule the natural

laws of physics, and cannot increase the

grip available according to the condition of

the road.

40) The ABS cannot prevent accidents,

including those due to excessive speed on

corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or

aquaplaning.

41) The capability of the ABS must never

be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in

such a way as to compromise personal

safety and the safety of others.

42) For the correct operation of the ABS,

the tyres must of necessity be the same

make and type on all wheels, in perfect

condition and, above all, of the prescribed

type and dimensions.

43) The ESC system cannot alter the

natural laws of physics, and cannot

increase grip, which depends on the

condition of the road.

44) The ESC system cannot prevent

accidents, including those due to excessive

speed on corners, driving on low-grip

surfaces or aquaplaning.

45) The capability of the ESC system must

never be tested irresponsibly and

dangerously, in such a way as to

compromise personal safety and the safety

of others.

46) For the correct operation of the ESC

system, the tyres must necessarily be of

the same make and type on all wheels, in

perfect condition and, above all, of the

prescribed type and size.

47) ESC performance features must not

induce the driver to take unnecessary or

unwarranted risks. Your driving style must

always be suited to the road conditions,

visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any

case, responsible for safe driving.

48) For the correct operation of the TC

system, the tyres must of necessity be the

same make and type on all wheels, in

perfect condition and, above all, of the

prescribed type and dimensions.

49) TC performance features must not

induce the driver to take unnecessary or

unwarranted risks. Your driving style must

always be suited to the road conditions,

visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any

case, responsible for safe driving.

50) The TC system cannot overrule the

natural laws of physics, and cannot

increase the grip available according to the

condition of the road.

51) The TC system cannot prevent

accidents, including those due to excessive

speed on corners, driving on low-grip

surfaces or aquaplaning.

52) The capability of the TC must never be

tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in

such a way as to compromise personal

safety and the safety of others.

53) The PBA system cannot overrule the

natural laws of physics, and cannot

increase the grip available according to the

condition of the road.

54) The PBA system cannot prevent

accidents, including those due to excessive

speed on corners, driving on low-grip

surfaces or aquaplaning.

55) The capability of the PBA system must

never be tested irresponsibly and

dangerously, in such a way as to

compromise the safety of the driver, the

other occupants of the vehicle or any other

road user.

56) The Hill Hold Control system is not a

parking brake; therefore, never leave the

vehicle without having engaged the parking

brake, turned the engine off and engaged

first gear, so that it is parked in safe

conditions (for further information read the

"Parking" paragraph in the "Starting and

driving" chapter).

57) There may be situations on small

gradients (less than 8%), with vehicle

laden, in which the Hill Hold Control system

may not activate, causing a slight reversing

motion and increasing the risk of collision

with another vehicle or object. The driver is,

in any case, responsible for safe driving.

58) The performance of a vehicle with ERM

must never be tested in imprudent or

dangerous ways, with the possibility of

putting the safety of the driver or other

people at risk.

59) When towing trailers, the utmost

caution at the wheel is recommended.

Never exceed the maximum permitted

loads (see the description in the "Weights"

paragraph in the "Technical Specifications"

chapter).

60) The TSC system cannot prevent

swerving for all trailers. If the system

activates during driving, reduce the speed,

stop the vehicle in a safe place and arrange

the load correctly to prevent the trailer from

swerving.

DRIVING

ASSISTANCE

SYSTEMS

FULL BRAKE CONTROL

SYSTEM

61) 62) 63) 64)

27) 28) 29) 30) 31) 32) 33) 34) 35)

The Full Brake Control system is a

SUPPLEMENTARY AID to help the

driver avoid hitting the vehicles in front.

It does not replace the driver, who must

maintain the safety distance and adjust

the vehicle’s speed according to the

traffic, visibility and weather conditions,

even when the system is active.

DO NOT wait for a collision warning to

reduce speed. If the driver fails to use

the brake pedal, it could cause a

collision.

The Full Brake Control system does not

detect pedestrians, animals or other

obstacles that cross the direction of

travel, nor vehicles traveling in the

opposite direction.

The Fill Brake Control system consists

of a radar located behind the front

bumper fig. 87.

SAFETY

In the event of an imminent collision the

system may intervene by braking the

vehicle to prevent the crash or reduce

its effects.

When the system detects the risk of

collision, it gives the driver acoustic and

visual signals through specific

messages on the instrument panel

display. The signals are intended to

allow the driver to react promptly, in

order to prevent or reduce the effects of

a potential accident.

If the system does not detect any

action by the driver, it can intervene by

braking automatically to attenuate the

potential accident (automatic braking). If

the system detects that the driver is

pressing the brake pedal, but this is not

deemed sufficient, the system may

intervene in order to improve the

reaction of the braking system,

therefore reducing vehicle speed further

(additional assistance during braking).

Versions equipped with Start&Stop

system: at the end of the automatic

braking, the Start&Stop system will

activate as described in paragraph

"Start&Stop system" of the "Starting

and driving" chapter.

Versions with manual gearbox:at

the end of the automatic braking the

engine may stall and turn off, unless the

driver presses the clutch pedal.

IMPORTANT After the car is stopped,

the brake callipers may be locked for

about 2 seconds for safety reasons.

Make sure you press the brake pedal if

the vehicle moves slightly forwards.

Engagement/disengagement

The Full Brake Control can be

deactivated (and subsequently

reactivated) through the instrument

panel Menu.

With the Uconnect™ 5" or 7" HD

system, some Menu items are shown

and managed on the display of the

latter and not on the instrument panel

display (refer to the dedicated

Multimedia chapter or to the

supplement available online).

The system can be deactivated even

with the ignition device at MAR.

IMPORTANT The system status can be

changed with vehicle at a standstill only.

The Full Brake Control can be set by

selecting one of the 3 Menu options:

System active: the system (if active),

in addition to the visual and acoustic

warnings, can provide automatic

braking and additional assistance

during braking, if the driver does not

brake hard enough in the event of a

potential impact with the vehicle in

front;

System partially active: the system (if

active), does not give the visual and

acoustic warnings, but can provide

automatic braking and additional

assistance during braking, if the driver

does not brake hard enough in the

event of a potential impact with the

vehicle in front;

System deactivated: the system

does not give visual and acoustic

warnings, limited braking, automatic

braking or additional assistance during

braking. The system will therefore

provide no indication of a possible

accident.

Activation/deactivation

If the Full Brake Control system has

been correctly activated from the Menu,

it will be active each time the engine is

started.

Following a deactivation, the system will

P2000076-000-000

not warn the driver about the possible

collision with the preceding vehicle.

The system deactivation status will not

be stored when the engine is switched

off: if the system is deactivated when

the engine is switched off, it will be

active when it is next started.

This function is not active at a speed

lower than 7 km/h or higher than

200 km/h.

The system is only active if:

it is correctly activated through the

Menu;

the ignition device is at MAR;

the vehicle speed is between 7 and

200 km/h;

the front seat belts are fastened.

Changing the system sensitivity

The sensitivity of the system can be

changed through the Menu, choosing

from one of the following three options:

"Near", "Med" or "Far". See the

description in the Uconnect™ 5" o 7"

HD supplement for how to change the

settings.

The pre-set option is "Near". With this

setting, the system will warn the driver

of a possible collision with the vehicle in

front when it is close. This setting offers

the driver a lower reaction time

compared to the "Med" and "Far"

settings, in the event of a potential

collision, but permits more dynamic

driving of the vehicle.

With the system sensitivity set to "Far",

the system will warn the driver of a

possible collision with the vehicle in

front when that vehicle is at a greater

distance, thus providing the possibility

of acting on the brakes more lightly and

gradually. This setting provides the

drivers with the maximum possible

reaction time to prevent a potential

accident.

Changing the setting to “Med”, the

system warns the driver of a possible

collision with the vehicle in front when it

is at a standard distance, between that

of the other two settings. The system

sensitivity setting is kept in the memory

when the engine is switched off.

System failure signalling

If the system switches off and a

dedicated message is shown on the

display, it means that there is a fault on

the system.

In this case, it is still possible to drive

the vehicle, but you are advised to

contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible.

Radar indication not available

If conditions are such that the radar

cannot detect obstacles correctly, the

system is deactivated and a dedicated

message appears on the display. This

generally occurs in the event of poor

visibility, such as when it is snowing or

raining heavily.

The system can also be temporarily

dimmed due to obstructions such as

mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In such

cases, a dedicated message will be

shown on the display and the system

will be deactivated. This message can

sometimes appear in conditions of high

reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective

tiles or ice or snow). When the

conditions limiting the system functions

end, this will go back to normal and

complete operation.

In certain particular cases, this

dedicated message could be displayed

when the radar is not detecting any

vehicles or objects within its view range.

If atmospheric conditions are not the

real reason behind this message, check

if the sensor is dirty. It could be

necessary to clean or remove any

obstructions in the area illustrated in

fig. 87.

If the message appears often, even in

the absence of atmospheric conditions

such as snow, rain, mud or other

obstructions, contact a Fiat Dealership

for a sensor alignment check.

In the absence of visible obstructions,

cleaning the radar surface, by manually

SAFETY

removing the decorative cover trim,

could be required. For this operation,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT It is recommended that

you do not install devices, accessories

or aerodynamic attachments in front of

the sensor or darken it in any way, as

this can compromise the correct

functioning of the system. Any

modifications to the vehicle’s geometry

or its front area (including repairs not

done by the Fiat Dealership) can affect

the proper operation of the device.

Frontal collision alarm with active

braking

(where provided)

If this functions is enabled and the

system detects the risk of a collision, it

can activate the brakes to slow the car

down.

This function applies an additional

braking pressure if the braking pressure

applied by the driver does not suffice to

prevent potential frontal impact.

The function is active with speed above

7 km/h.

Driving in special conditions

In certain driving conditions, such as,

for example:

driving close to a bend;

vehicles with small dimensions

and/or not aligned in the driving lane;

lane change by other vehicles;

vehicles travelling at right angles to

the vehicle.

The system’s intervention might be

unexpected or delayed. The driver must

therefore be very careful, keeping

control of the vehicle to drive in

complete safety.

IMPORTANT In particularly complex

traffic conditions, the driver can

deactivate the system through the

Menu.

Driving close to a bend

When tackling a wide bend, the system

may detect the presence of a vehicle in

front you, but not running on the same

driving lane fig. 88. In cases such as

these, the system may intervene.

Vehicles with small dimensions

and/or not aligned in the driving

lane

The system cannot detect vehicles in

front of you but outside the range of the

radar sensor and may therefore not

react in the presence of small vehicles,

such as bicycles or motorcycles fig. 89.

Lane change by other vehicles

Vehicles suddenly changing lane,

entering the driving lane of the vehicle

and inside the radar sensor operating

range, may cause system activation

fig. 90.

P2000039-000-000

P2000040-000-000

9Vehicles travelling at right angles

to the vehicle

The system may temporarily react to a

vehicle that is passing through the radar

sensor’s operating range at right angles

fig. 91.

Important notes

The system has not been designed

to prevent impacts and cannot detect

possible conditions leading to an

accident in advance. Failure to take into

account this warning may lead to

serious or fatal injuries.

The system may activate, assessing

the trajectory of the vehicle, due to the

presence of reflective metal objects

different from other vehicles, such as

safety barriers, road signs, barriers

before parking lots, tollgates, level

crossings, gates, railways, objects near

road constructions sites or higher than

the vehicle (e.g. a flyover). In the same

way, the system may intervene inside

multi-storey car parks or tunnels, or due

to a glare on the road surface. These

possible activations follow the normal

operating logic of the system and must

not be regarded as faults.

The system has been designed for

road use only. If the vehicle is driven

off-road, the system must be

deactivated, to avoid unnecessary

warnings.

The system should be deactivated

when the vehicle is loaded on a train,

ferry or lorry, when it is towed or put on

a roller test bench.

iTPMS (indirect Tyre

Pressure Monitoring

System)

65) 66) 67) 68) 69) 70)

Description

The vehicle is equipped with the iTPMS

(indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring

System) which monitors the tyre

inflation status thanks to wheel speed

sensors.

Correct tyre pressure

If no flat tyres are detected, the outline

of the vehicle will be shown on the

display.

Low tyre pressure

The system warns the driver if one or

more tyres are flat by switching on the

warning light on the instrument

panel and a warning message on the

display, along with an acoustic signal.

In this case, the outline of the vehicle is

shown on the display with the two

symbols

This indication is displayed also when

turning the engine off and on again until

the RESET procedure is carried out.

Reset procedure

The iTPMS needs an initial

"self-learning" phase (with length

depending on the driving style and road

conditions: optimal conditions being

driving on a straight road at 80 km/h for

P2000041-000-000

P2000042-000-000

SAFETY

at least 20 minutes) which starts when

the RESET procedure is carried out.

The RESET procedure must be carried

out:

each time tyre pressure is modified;

when even only one tyre is changed;

when tyres are rotated/inverted;

when the space-saver wheel is fitted.

Before carrying out the RESET

procedure, inflate the tyres to the rated

pressure values specified in the inflation

pressure table (see "Wheels" paragraph

in the "Technical specifications"

chapter).

If the RESET is not carried out, in all

above cases, the

warning light may

give false indications on one or more

tyres.

To carry out the RESET, with the vehicle

stationary and the engine on, hold

down the Reset button

located on

the left control panel fig. 92 for at least

2 seconds.

When the RESET procedure has been

carried out, and depending on the type

of instrument panel, either only a buzzer

will be heard or the message "Reset

saved" will appear together with the

buzzer to indicate that self-learning has

started.

Operating conditions

The system is active for speeds above

15 km/h.

In a few situations such as sporty

driving, particular conditions of the road

surface (e.g. icy, snowy, unsurfaced

roads) the signalling may be delayed or

partial in detecting the contemporary

deflation of more than one tyre.

Under special conditions (e.g. vehicle

loaded asymmetrically on one side,

towing a trailer, damaged or worn tyre,

fitting the space-saver wheel, use of the

"Fix&Go Automatic" tyre repair kit, fitting

snow chains, fitting different tyres on

the axles) the system may provide false

indications or be temporarily

deactivated.

If the system is temporarily deactivated

the

warning light flashes for about

75 seconds and then is continuously

on; at the same time, the display shows

a warning message.

This indication is displayed also after

the engine has been switched off and

then on again if the correct operating

conditions are not restored.

In the case of abnormal signals, it is

recommended to perform the RESET

procedure. If the signals reappear once

the RESET procedure has started,

check that the type of tyres used are

the same on all four wheels and that the

tyres are not damaged; if the

space-saver wheel is being used, refit

the wheel with a tire with normal

dimensions instead of the space-saver

wheel as soon as possible; if possible

remove the snow chains; make sure

that the load is distributed correctly and

repeat the RESET procedure, driving on

a clean and surfaced road. If the signals

persist, contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

61) The system is an aid for the driver, who

must always pay full attention while driving.

The responsibility always rests with the

driver, who must take into account the

traffic conditions in order to drive in

complete safety. The driver must always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in

front.

06056J0001EM

62) If the driver depresses the brake pedal

fully or carries out a fast steering during

system operation, the automatic braking

function may stop (e.g. to allow a possible

manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle).

63) The system intervenes on vehicles

travelling in the same lane. People, animals

and things (e.g. pushchairs) are not taken

into consideration.

64) If the car must be placed on a roller

bench for maintenance interventions or if it

is washed in an automatic roller washing

tunnel with an obstacle in the front part

(e.g. another car, a wall or another

obstacle), the system may detect its

presence and activate. In this case the

system must be deactivated through the

settings of the Uconnect™ 5" or 7" HD

system.

65) If the iTMPS system signals a pressure

decrease on the tyres, it is recommended

to check the pressure on all four tyres.

66) The iTPMS does not relieve the driver

from the obligation to check the tyre

pressure every month; it is not even to be

considered a replacing system for

maintenance or a safety system.

67) Tyre pressure must be checked with

tyres cold. Should it become necessary for

whatever reason to check pressure with

warm tyres, do not reduce pressure even

though it is higher than the prescribed

value, but repeat the check when tyres are

cold

68) The iTPMS cannot indicate sudden tyre

pressure drops (e.g. if a tyre bursts). In this

case, stop the vehicle, braking with caution

and avoiding abrupt steering.

69) The system only warns that the tyre

pressure is low: it is not able to inflate

them.

70) Insufficient tyre inflation increases fuel

consumption, reduces the tread duration

and may affect the capacity to drive safely.

IMPORTANT

27) The system may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such

as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.

28) The section of the bumper before the

sensor must not be covered with

adhesives, auxiliary headlights or any other

object.

29) System intervention might be

unexpected or delayed when other vehicles

transport loads projecting from the side,

above or from the rear, with respect to the

normal size of the vehicle.

30) Operation can be adversely affected by

any structural change made to the vehicle,

such as a modification to the front

geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load

than the standard load of the vehicle.

31) Incorrect repairs made on the front part

of the vehicle (e.g. bumper, chassis) may

alter the position of the radar sensor, and

adversely affect its operation. Go to a Fiat

Dealership for any operation of this type.

32) Do not tamper nor operate on the radar

sensor. In the event of a sensor failure,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

33) When towing a trailer (with modules

installed after purchasing the vehicle), a

vehicle or during loading manoeuvres on a

vehicle transporter (or in vehicle for

transport), the system must be deactivated

via the Uconnect™ 5" or 7" HD system.

34) Do not wash with high-pressure jets in

the bumper lower area: in particular do not

operate on the system's electrical

connector.

35) Be careful in the case of repairs and

new paintings in the area around the

sensor (panel covering the sensor on the

left side of the bumper). In the event of a

frontal impact the sensor may automatically

deactivate and display a warning to indicate

that the sensor needs to be repaired. Even

without a malfunction warning, deactivate

the system operation if you think that the

position of the radar sensor has changed

(e.g. due to low-speed frontal impact as

during parking manoeuvres). In these

cases, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the

radar sensor realigned or replaced.

SAFETY

OCCUPANT

PROTECTION

SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety

equipment of the vehicle comprise the

following protection systems:

seat belts;

SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system;

head restraints;

child restraint systems;

Front air bags, side air bags and

drop down air bags (where provided).

Read the information given the following

pages with the utmost care. It is of

fundamental importance that the

protection systems are used in the

correct way to guarantee the maximum

possible safety level for the driver and

the passengers.

For the description of the head restraint

adjustment see the "Head restraints"

paragraph in the "Knowing your vehicle"

chapter.

SEAT BELTS

All vehicle seats are equipped with seat

belts with three anchor points and a

retractor.

The retractor mechanism operates

locking the belt in the event of sharp

braking or strong deceleration due to

an impact. This allows the belt strap to

slide freely and to adapt to the body of

the occupant. In the event of an

accident, the belt will lock reducing the

risk of impact inside the passenger

compartment and of being projected

outside the vehicle.

The driver is responsible for respecting,

and ensuring that all the other

occupants of the vehicle also respect,

the local laws in force in relation to the

use of the seat belts.

Always fasten the seat belts before

setting off.

USING THE SEAT BELTS

The seat belt should be worn keeping

the chest straight and rested against

the backrest.

To fasten the seat belts, hold the tab 1

fig. 93 and insert it into the buckle 2,

until it clicks into place.

On removal of the belt, if it jams, let it

rewind for a short stretch, then pull it

out again without jerking.

To unfasten the seat belts, press button

3fig. 93 and guide the seat belt with

your hand while it is rewinding, to

prevent it from twisting.

71) 72)

The retractor may lock when the vehicle

is parked on a steep slope: this is

perfectly normal. Furthermore, the reel

mechanism locks the belt if it is pulled

sharply or in the event of sudden

braking, collisions and high-speed

bends.

Once seated, put on the rear seat belts

as shown in fig. 94.

06056J0004EM

ADJUSTING THE FRONT

SEAT BELT HEIGHT

73) 74)

Four different adjustments in height are

possible.

To carry out window height adjustment,

from the top to the bottom, button 1

fig. 95 must be pressed, and the handle

must be slid downwards.

To carry out window height adjustment,

from the top to the bottom, the handle

must be slid (without pressing

anything).

Always adjust the height of the seat

belts to fit the person wearing it: this

precaution could greatly reduce the risk

of injury in the event of collision.

Correct adjustment is obtained when

the belt passes approximately half way

between the shoulder and the neck.

WARNING

71) Never press button 3 when travelling.

72) Remember that, in the event of an

accident, the rear seat passengers not

wearing seat belts are exposed to a very

serious risk and also represent a serious

danger for the front seat occupants.

73) Make height adjustment of the seat

belts when the car is stationary.

74) After the height adjustment, always

check that the grip is locked in one of the

preset positions. To do this, with button

1 released, exert further pressure

downwards to allow the locking device to

click if the grip has not been released in

one of the possible positions.

P103FI84-000-000

06056J0003EM

SAFETY

SBR (SEAT BELT

REMINDER) SYSTEM

(for versions/markets, where provided)

The SBR system warns the passengers

of the front and rear (where provided)

seats if their seat belt is not fastened.

The system signals unfastened seat

belts with visual warnings (warning

lights on in the instrument panel and

symbols on the display) and an

acoustic signal (see the following

paragraphs).

NOTE To deactivate the acoustic

warning permanently go to a Fiat

Dealership. The acoustic warning can

be reactivated at any time through the

display menu (see the "Display"

paragraph in the "Knowing the

instrument panel" chapter).

Operation of front seat belt warning

light

When the ignition device is turned to

MAR, warning light

(see fig. 96 )

comes on for a few seconds,

regardless of the status of the front seat

belts.

With vehicle at a standstill, if the driver

side seat belt or the passenger side

seat belt (with occupant seated) is

unfastened, the warning light stays on

constantly.

As soon as the threshold of 8 km/h

(5 mph) is reached for a few seconds

with driver or passenger side (with

passenger present) seat belts

unfastened, an acoustic warning is

activated together with the flashing of

the

warning light for approximately

100 seconds.

When this cycle of warnings is activated

it will stay on for its entire length

(regardless of the vehicle speed) or until

the seat belts are fastened again.

When the reverse is engaged, during

the cycle of warnings, the acoustic

signal is deactivated and the

warning light turns on constantly.

The cycle of warnings will be

reactivated as soon as speed exceeds

8 km/h again.

Operation of rear seat belt symbols

The symbols are shown on the display

fig. 97 after a few seconds have

elapsed since the ignition device is

turned to MAR.

The symbols are displayed according to

the corresponding seat belts and turn

off at least 30 seconds after the doors

have been closed or after a change in

the seat belt fastening status.

seat belt unfastened

seat belt fastened

The symbols shown on the display

indicate:

A: rear left seat belt;

B: rear central seat belt;

C: rear right seat belt.

P2000037-000-000

If a rear seat belt is unfastened, an

acoustic warning (3 "beeps") will be

activated along with the relevant symbol

lighting up on the display.

Furthermore the symbols will light up

again for 30 seconds each time one of

the rear doors is closed.

The symbol will change state after the

corresponding seat belt has been

fastened again.

After about 30 seconds from the last

indication, the rear seat symbols will

switch off, irrespective of the seat belt

status.

IMPORTANT NOTES

As far as the rear seats are concerned,

the SBR system will only indicate

whether the seat belts are unfastened

or fastened, not the presence of any

passengers.

The warning lights/symbols are all off if

all seat belts (front and rear) are

fastened when the ignition device is at

MAR.

For the rear seats, the symbols will

activate a few seconds after the ignition

device has been turned to MAR,

regardless of the status of the seat belts

(even if the seat belts are all fastened).

All the warning lights/symbols will come

on when at least one belt changes from

fastened to unfastened status or vice

versa.

PRE-TENSIONERS

The vehicle is equipped with front seat

belt pretensioners, which draw back the

seat belts by several centimetres in the

event of a strong frontal impact. This

guarantees the perfect adherence of

the seat belts to the occupant's bodies

before the retention action begins.

It is evident that the pretensioners have

been activated when the safety belt

withdraws toward the retractor.

This vehicle is also equipped with a

second pretensioner (in the kick plate

area). Its activation is signalled by the

shortening of the metal cable and rolling

up of the protective sheath.

A slight discharge of smoke may be

produced during the activation of the

pretensioner which is not harmful and

does not involve any fire hazard.

The pretensioner does not require any

maintenance or lubrication: any

changes to its original conditions will

invalidate its efficiency.

If, due to unusual natural events (floods,

sea storms, etc.), the device has been

affected by water and/or mud, contact

a Fiat Dealership to have it replaced.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highest

degree of protection from the action of

the pretensioner, wear the seat belt

tight to the torso and pelvis.

P2000011-000-000

SAFETY

LOAD LIMITERS

75)

36)

To increase safety in the event of an

accident, the front seat belt retractors

contain a load limiter which controls the

force acting on the chest and shoulders

during the belt restraining action in the

event of a head-on collision.

GENERAL

INSTRUCTIONS FOR

USING THE SEAT BELTS

76) 77) 78)

Seat belts must also be worn by

pregnant women: the risk of injury in the

event of an accident is reduced for

them and the unborn child if they are

wearing a seat belt.

Pregnant women must position the

lower part of the belt very low down so

that it passes over the pelvis and under

the abdomen fig. 98. While pregnancy

progresses, the driver must adjust both

seat and steering wheel to have full

control over the vehicle (pedals and

steering wheel must be easy to

access). The maximum clearance

should be kept between the abdomen

and the steering wheel.

The seat belt must not be twisted. The

upper part must pass over the shoulder

and cross the chest diagonally. The

lower part must adhere to the pelvis

fig. 99, not to the abdomen of the

occupant. Never use devices (clips,

clamps, etc.) that hold the seat belt

away from your body.

Each seat belt must be used by only

one person. Never travel with a child

sitting on the passenger's lap and a

single belt to protect them both

fig. 100. In general, do not place any

objects between the person and the

belt.

SEAT BELTS

MAINTENANCE

For keeping the seat belts in efficient

conditions, carefully observe the

following warnings:

always use the seat belt well

stretched and never twisted; make sure

that it is free to run without

obstructions;

check seat belt operation as follows:

attach the seat belt and pull it hard;

replace the belt after an accident of a

certain severity even if it does not

appear to be damaged. Always replace

the seat belt if the pretensioners were

deployed;

F1B0107C

F1B0108C

100

F1B0109C

prevent the retractors from getting

wet: their correct operation is only

guaranteed if water does not get inside;

replace the seat belt when it shows

wear or cuts.

WARNING

75) The pretensioner may be used only

once. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have it

replaced after it has been deployed.

76) Removing or otherwise tampering with

pretensioner and seat belt components is

strictly prohibited. Any intervention on

these components must be performed by

qualified and authorised technicians.

Always go to a Fiat Dealership.

77) For maximum safety, keep the backrest

upright, lean back into it and make sure the

seat belt fits closely across your chest and

pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts for both

the front and rear seats! Travelling without

wearing seat belts will increase the risk of

serious injury and even death in the event

of an accident.

78) If the belt has been subjected to high

levels of stress, for example after an

accident, it should be changed completely

together with the attachments, attachment

fixing screws and the pretensioner. In fact,

even if the belt has no visible defects, it

may have lost its resilience.

IMPORTANT

36) Operations which lead to impacts,

vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C

for a maximum of six hours) in the area

around the pretensioner may cause

damage or make it deploy. Contact a Fiat

Dealership should intervention be

necessary on these components.

CHILD PROTECTION

SYSTEMS

CARRYING CHILDREN

SAFELY

79) 80) 81) 82)

For optimal protection in the event of an

impact, all occupants must be seated

and wearing adequate restraint

systems, including newborn and other

children!

This prescription is compulsory in all EC

countries according to EC Directive

2003/20/EC.

Children below the height of

1.50 metres and up to 12 years must

be protected with suitable restraint

systems and be seated on the rear

seats.

Statistics on accidents indicate that the

rear seats offer greater safety for

children.

Compared with an adult, a child's head

is larger and heavier in proportion to

their body and the child's muscular and

bone structures are not fully developed.

Therefore, correct restraint systems

other than adult seat belts are

necessary, to reduce as much as

possible the risk of injuries in the event

of an accident, braking or sudden

manoeuvre.

Children must be seated safely and

SAFETY

comfortably. Depending on the

characteristics of the child restraint

systems used, you are advised to keep

children in rearward facing child

restraint systems for as long as possible

(at least until 3-4 years old), since this is

the most protected position in the event

of an impact.

It is recommended to always choose

the restraint system most suitable for

the child; for this reason always refer to

the Owner Handbook provided with the

child restraint system, to be sure that it

is of the right type for the children it is

intended for.

In Europe the characteristics of child

restraint systems are ruled by the

regulation ECE-R44, dividing them into

five weight groups:

Group Weight groups

Group 0

up to 10 kg in

weight

Group 0+

up to 13 kg in

weight

Group 1 9 - 18 kg

Group 2 15 - 25 kg

Group 3 22 - 36 kg

All restraint devices must bear the

certification data, together with the

control mark, on a label solidly fixed to

the child restraint system which must

never be removed.

Lineaccessori MOPAR

includes child

restraint systems for each weight

group. These devices are

recommended having been specifically

designed for Fiat vehicles.

FITTING A CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WITH SEAT BELTS

The Universal child restraint systems

installed with the seat belts only are

type-approved on the basis of the ECE

R44 standard and are divided into

various weight groups.

83) 84) 85) 86)

IMPORTANT The figures are indicative

and provided for assembly purposes

only. Fit the child restraint system

according to the instructions, which

must be included.

Group 0 and 0+

Babies up to 13 kg must be carried

with a rear facing child restraint system

of a type as shown in fig. 101 which,

supporting the head, does not induce

stress on the neck in the event of

sudden decelerations.

The child restraint system is secured by

the vehicle seat belts, as shown in and

it must restrain the child in turn with its

own belts.

Group 1

Children of weight from 9 to 18 kg may

be transported in forward facing child

restraint systems fig. 102.

101

06096J0001EM

102

06096J0002EM

Group 2

Children from 15 to 25 kg may be

restrained directly by the car seat belts

fig. 103.

In this case, the child restraint system is

used to position the child correctly with

respect to the seat belts so that the

diagonal belt section crosses the child’s

chest and not the neck, and the lower

part is snug on the pelvis not the

abdomen.

Group 3

For children between 22 kg and 36 kg,

there are dedicated restraint systems

that allow the seat belt to be worn

correctly.

The fig. 104 shows the correct child

positioning on the rear seat.

Children over 1.50 m in height can wear

seat belts like adults.

103

06096J0003EM

104

06096J0004EM

SAFETY

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON UNIVERSAL CHILD

RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE

According to the European Directive 2000/3/EC the suitability of each passenger seat position for the fixing of universal child

restraint systems is shown in the following table:

Positioning the “Universal” child restraint system

Group Weight groups

Front passenger

(*)

Rear central

passenger

Rear side

passengers

Airbag enabled Airbag disabled

Group0 upto13kg X U X U

Group 0+ up to 13 kg X U X U

Group 1 9-18 kg X U X U

Group 2 15-25 kg U U X U

Group 3 22-36 kg U U X U

(*)IMPORTANT: NEVER fit a rearward-facing child seat in the front passenger seat if the airbag is active. If you wish to fit a rearward-facing child

seat in the front passenger seat, first deactivate the relative airbag (see instructions in the paragraph (Supplementary protection system (SRS)

– Airbag”)

X = Seat not suitable for children in this weight category.

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified

“Groups”.

INSTALLING AN ISOFIX

CHILD CARSEAT

87) 88) 89)

The rear side seats of the vehicle are

equipped with ISOFIX anchors, for

fitting child restraint systems quickly,

simply and safely. The ISOFIX system

lets you install the ISOFIX child

restraining system without using the car

seat belts but connecting them directly

to the carseat with three anchors in the

car.

Traditional child restraint systems can

be fitted alongside ISOFIX child restraint

systems on different seats in the same

vehicle.

To install an ISOFIX child restraint

system, attach it to the two metal

anchors 1 fig. 105 located behind the

cushion of the rear seat, in the point

where it meets the backrest, then fix the

upper hook of the child restraint system

to the dedicated anchor 2

fig. 106 located behind the seat

backrest.

As an example, fig. 108 shows an

example of a Universal ISOFIX child

restraint system for weight group 1.

The other weight groups are covered by

specific ISOFIX child restraint systems,

which can be used only if specifically

tested for this vehicle (see list of

vehicles provided with the child restraint

system).

IMPORTANT The fig. 108 is indicative

and for assembly purposes only. Fit the

child restraint system according to the

instructions, which must be included.

105

06096J0008EM

106

P1030218-000-000

107

F1B0117C

108

06096J0007EM

SAFETY

NOTE When a Universal ISOFIX child

restraint system is used, only ECE R44

"ISOFIX Universal” (R44/03 or further

upgrades) type-approved child restraint

systems can be used (see fig. 107 ).

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE

ISOFIX POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE

Weight categories Size category Device Front passenger

Rear side

passengers

Rear central

passenger

Group 0 (up to 10 kg) E ISO/R1

XILX

Group 0+ (up to 13 kg)

E ISO/R1

XILX

D ISO/R2

XILX

C ISO/R3

X IL (*) X

Group 1 (from 9 up to

18 kg)

D ISO/R2

XILX

C ISO/R3

X IL (*) X

B ISO/F2

IUF

-IL

B1 ISO/F2X

IUF

- IL

A ISO/F3

IUF

- IL

X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child protection systems for this weight and/or size category.

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the categories for "specific vehicles", "restricted", or "semiuniversal", approved for this type

car.

IL (*) The ISOFIX child restraint system can be installed by adjusting the front seat.

IUF Suitable for forward facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Universal category and type-approved for the use in the weight group.

SAFETY

SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR i-Size CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE

The following table, according to European standard ECE 129, indicates the possibility of i-Size child restraint system

installation.

i-Size POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE

Device Front passenger

Rear side

passengers

Rear central

passenger

i-Size child restraint systems

ISO/R2 X i-U X

ISO/F2 X i-U X

i-U: suitable for Universal i-Size child restraint systems, both rearward facing and forward facing.

X: seat not suitable for Universal i-Size child restraint systems.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS RECOMMENDED BY FIAT FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Lineaccessori MOPAR

includes a complete range of child restraint systems to be fixed using the seat belt with three

anchorage points or the ISOFIX anchorages.

IMPORTANT FCA recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included.

Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system

Child restraint system

installation

Group 0+ :

from birth to 13 kg

from 40 cm to

80 cm

Britax Baby Safe plus

Type-approval number: E1 04301146

Fiat order code: 71806415

Universal/ISOFIX child restraint

system.

It must be installed facing

rearwards, using the vehicle

seat belts only, or the dedicated

ISOFIX base (which can be

purchased separately) and the

vehicle ISOFIX anchorages.

It must be fitted on the rear

outer seats.

Britax Baby Safe ISOFIX base

Fiat order code: 71806416

SAFETY

Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system

Child restraint system

installation

Group 1:

from9upto18kg

from 67 cm to

105 cm

Fair G0/1S

Type-approval number: E4 04443718

Fiat order code: 71807388

Universal/ISOFIX child restraint

system.

It can be fitted using the vehicle

seat belts (forward facing only)

or using the ISOFIX anchorages

of the vehicle.

FCA recommends fitting it using

the rear facing ISOFIX platform

(RWF specific "G" type - to be

purchased separately) or the

forward facing ISOFIX platform

(FWF specific "A" type - to be

purchased separately), the rigid

head restraint (to be purchased

separately) and the ISOFIX

anchorages for the vehicle.

It must be fitted on the rear

outer seats.

Reference A: Fair ISOFIX RWF

platform type “G” for G 0/1S

Fiat order code: 71807455

Reference B: Fair ISOFIX RWF

platform, "A" type for G 0/1S

Fiat order code: 71805364

FAIR head restraint

Fiat order code: 71807387

Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system

Child restraint system

installation

Group 1:

from9upto18kg

from 67 cm to

105 cm

Britax Safefix TT

Type-approval number: E1 04301199

Fiat order code: 71805956

It must be fitted facing forwards

only, using the ISOFIX

attachments and the upper

strap, provided with the child

restraint system.

It must be fitted on the rear

outer seats.

Britax Roemer Duo Plus

Type-approval number: E1 04301133

Fiat order code: 71803161

It must be fitted facing forwards

only, using the ISOFIX

attachments and the upper

strap, provided with the child

restraint system.

It must be fitted on the rear

outer seats.

SAFETY

Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system

Child restraint system

installation

Group 2:

from 15 to 25 kg

from 95 cm to

135 cm

Takata Maxi Plus

Type-approval number: E4 0444 4003

Fiat order code: 50547087

It can only be fitted facing

forwards, using the three-point

seat belt and the ISOFIX

anchorages of the vehicle, if

present.

Fiat recommends installing it

using the vehicle’s ISOFIX

anchor points.

It must be fitted on the rear

outer seats.

Fiat recommends always using

the backrest for children up to

135 cm tall.

Group 3:

from 22 to 36 kg

from 136 cm to

150 cm

Takata Maxi Plus

Type-approval number: E4 0444 4003

Fiat order code: 50547087

It can only be fitted facing

forwards, using the three-point

seat belt and the ISOFIX

anchorages of the vehicle, if

present.

Fiat recommends installing it

using the vehicle’s ISOFIX

anchor points.

It must be fitted on the rear

outer seats.

Main recommendations to carry

children safely

Install the child restraint systems on

the rear seat, which is the most

protected position in the event of an

impact.

Keep children in rearward facing child

restraint systems for as long as

possible, until 3–4 years old if possible.

If the passenger's front airbag is

deactivated always check the

dedicated warning light on the trim

located on the dashboard to make sure

that it has actually been deactivated.

Carefully follow the instructions

supplied with the child restraint system.

Keep the instructions in the vehicle

along with the other documents and

this handbook. Do not use

second-hand child restraint systems

without instructions.

Only one child is to be strapped into

each restraint system; never carry two

children using one child restraint

system.

Always check that the seat belts do

not rest on the child’s neck.

Always check that the seat belt is

well fastened by pulling on it.

While travelling, do not let the child

sit incorrectly or unfasten the belts.

Never allow a child to put the belt's

diagonal section under an arm or

behind their back.

Never carry children on your lap,

even newborns. No one can hold a

child in the case of an accident.

If the car has been involved in a road

accident, replace the child restraint

system with a new one. In addition, and

depending on the type of child restraint

system installed, replace the isofix

anchorages or the seat belt with which

the child restraint system was

connected.

Any child restraint systems fitted

facing forward on an outside rear seat,

independently of its weight group, must

be fitted after removing the headrest

relative to the seat where it is to be

fitted. This does not apply to child

restraint systems that only consist of a

cushion (without backrest): these child

restraint systems must be installed

when the relative headrest is fitted.

WARNING

79) SEVERE DANGER When a front

passenger airbag is fitted, do not install

rearward facing child restraint systems on

the front passenger seat. Deployment of

the airbag in an accident could cause fatal

injuries to the child regardless of the

severity of the collision. It is advisable to

always carry children in a child restraint

system on the rear seat, which is the most

protected position in the event of a

collision.

80) On the sun visor there is a label with

suitable symbols reminding the user that it

is compulsory to deactivate the airbag if a

rearward facing child restraint system is

fitted. Always comply with the instructions

on the passenger side sun visor (see the

"Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) -

Airbag" paragraph).

81) Should it be necessary to carry a child

on the passenger side front seat in a rear

facing child restraint system, the passenger

side front airbag and side bag must be

deactivated through the Connect system

main menu (see the "Supplementary

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag"

paragraph), verifying deactivation by

checking whether the

LED has

illuminated on the dashboard. Move the

passenger's seat as far back as possible to

avoid contact between the child seat and

the dashboard.

82) Do not move the front or rear seat if a

child is seated on it or on the dedicated

child restraint system

83) Incorrect fitting of the child restraint

system may result in an inefficient

protection system. In the event of an

accident the child restraint system may

become loose and the child may be

injured, even fatally. When fitting a restraint

system for newborns or children, strictly

comply with the instructions provided by

the Manufacturer.

84) When the child restraint system is not

used, secure it with the seat belt or with

the ISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from

the vehicle. Do not leave it unsecured

inside the passenger compartment. In this

way, in the case of sudden braking or an

accident, it will not cause injuries to the

occupants.

100

SAFETY

85) After installing a child restraint system,

do not move the seat: always remove the

child restraint system before making any

adjustment.

86) Always make sure that the diagonal

section of the seat belt does not pass

under the arms or behind the back of the

child. In the event of an accident the seat

belt will not be able to secure the child,

with the risk of injury, including fatal injury.

Therefore the child must always wear the

seat belt correctly.

87) Do not use the same lower anchorage

to install more than one child restraint

system.

88) If a Universal ISOFIX child seat system

is not fixed to all three anchorages, it will

not be able to protect the child correctly. In

a crash, the child could be seriously or

fatally injured.

89) Fit the child restraint system when the

car is stationary. The child restraint system

is correctly fixed to the brackets when you

hear the click. Follow the instructions for

assembly, disassembly and positioning that

the Manufacturer must supply with the

child restraint system.

SUPPLEMENTARY

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS) - AIRBAG

The vehicle is equipped with:

front driver airbag;

front passenger airbag;

driver and passenger front side bags

for pelvis, chest and shoulder

protection (Side bags);

side bags for head protection of front

seat passengers and rear side seat

passengers (window bag).

The location of the airbags on the

vehicle is marked by the word

"AIRBAG" in the middle of the steering

wheel, on the dashboard, on the side

trim or on a label placed next to the

airbag deployment area.

FRONT AIRBAGS

The front (driver and passenger) airbags

protect the front seat occupants in the

event of head-on crashes of

medium-high severity, by placing the

cushion between the occupant and the

steering wheel or dashboard.

Therefore non-activation of airbags in

other types of collisions (side impacts,

rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not

indicate a system malfunction.

Driver and passenger front airbags are

not a replacement of but

complementary to the seat belts, which

should always be worn, as specified by

law in Europe and most non-European

countries.

In the event of impact, those not

wearing a seat belt are projected

forwards and may come into contact

with the bag which is still inflating. The

protection offered by the bag is

compromised in these circumstances.

Front airbags may not activate in the

following situations:

frontal impacts against highly

deformable objects not involving the

front surface of the vehicle (e.g. wing

collision against guard rail, etc.);

vehicle wedging under other

vehicles or protective barriers (e.g.

trucks or guard rails).

Failure to activate in the conditions

described above is due to the fact that

they may not provide any additional

protection compared with seat belts, so

their activation would be inappropriate.

In these cases, non-deployment does

not indicate a system malfunction.

The driver's and passenger's front

airbags have been designed and

calibrated to protect front seat

occupants wearing seat belts. At their

maximum inflation, their volume fills

most of the space between the steering

wheel and the driver and between the

dashboard and the passenger.

101

The airbags are not deployed in the

event of minor frontal impacts (for which

the restraining action of the seat belts is

sufficient).

Seat belts must always be worn. In the

event of frontal impacts they guarantee

correct positioning of the passenger.

Front airbag driver's side

This consists of an instantly inflating

bag contained in a special

compartment in the centre of the

steering wheel fig. 109.

Passenger side front airbag

This consists of an instantly inflating

bag contained in a special recess in the

dashboard fig. 110; this bag has a

larger volume than that of the driver's.

Passenger side front airbag and

child restraint systems

Rearward facing child restraint systems

must NEVER be fitted on the front seat

with an active passenger side airbag

since in the event of an impact the

airbag activation may cause fatal

injuries to the transported child.

ALWAYS comply with the instructions

on the label stuck on the passenger

side sun visor fig. 111.

Deactivating passenger front airbag

and seat-mounted side bag for

pelvis, chest and shoulders

protection

If a child must be carried on the front

seat in a rearward facing child restraint

system, deactivate the passenger side

front airbag and front side bag.

To deactivate the airbags use the

display Menu (see the instructions in the

"Display" paragraph, "Knowing the

instrument panel" chapter).

fig. 112 The

LED is present at the

middle of the instrument panel.

Moving the ignition device to MAR

switches on the LED for about

8 seconds. If not, contact a Fiat

Dealership. During the first seconds, the

activation of the LED does not actually

show the passenger protection status,

but only checks its correct operation.

After a test of a few seconds, the LED

will indicate the status of the passenger

airbag protection.

109

06106J0001EM

110

06106J0002EM

111

06106J0003EM

102

SAFETY

Passenger's protection active: the

LED is off.

Passenger protection deactivated:

the

LED switches on with a steady

light.

The LED may light up with a various

intensity depending on the vehicle

conditions. The intensity may vary

during the same key cycle.

112

P2000023-000-000

103

Passenger side front airbag and child restraint systems IMPORTANT

113

F1B0129C

104

SAFETY

SIDE BAGS

To help increase occupants protection

in the event of side impact collisions,

the vehicle is equipped with front side

bags and window bags.

Side bag

These comprise two bags located in

the front seat backrests fig. 114 which

protect the pelvis, chest and shoulder

area of the occupants in the event of a

side impact of medium/high severity.

They are marked by the "AIRBAG" label

sewn on the outer side of the front

seats.

Window bag

These consist of two “drop-down”

cushions, housed behind the side trim

of the roof and covered with finishing

elements fig. 115.

They are designed to protect the head

of front and rear occupants in the event

of a side collision, thanks to the wide

cushion inflation surface.

The deployment of side bags in the

event of side impacts of low severity is

not required.

In the event of a side impact, the

system provides best protection if the

passenger sits on the seat in a correct

position, thus allowing correct window

bag deployment.

90) 91) 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 98) 99) 100) 101) 103) 104) 105)

Important notes

Do not wash the seats with water or

pressurised steam (wash by hand or at

automatic seat washing stations).

The front and/or side airbags may

activate in the event of sharp impacts to

the underbody of the vehicle (e.g.

impact with steps, pavements, potholes

or road bumps etc.).

When the airbag deploys it emits a

small amount of dust: the dust is

harmless and does not indicate the

beginning of a fire. The dust may irritate

the skin and eyes however: in this case,

wash with neutral soap and water.

Airbag checking, repair and

replacement must be carried out at a

Fiat Dealership.

If the vehicle is scrapped, have the

airbag system deactivated at a Fiat

Dealership.

Pretensioners and airbags are deployed

in different ways on the basis of the

type of collision. Failure to activate one

or more of the devices does not

indicate a system malfunction.

WARNING

90) Do not apply stickers or other objects

on the steering wheel, on the dashboard in

the passenger side airbag area, on side

upholstery on the roof or on the seats.

Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on

the passenger side of the dashboard since

they could interfere with correct inflation of

the passenger airbag and also cause

serious injury to the passengers.

91) Always drive with your hands on the

rim of the steering wheel so that the airbag

can inflate freely if required. Do not drive

with your body bent forward. Keep your

back straight against the backrest.

114

06106J0008EM

115

P2000006-000-000

105

92) When there is an active passenger

airbag, DO NOT install rearward facing

child restraint systems on the front seat.

Deployment of the airbag in an accident

could cause fatal injuries to the child

regardless of the severity of the impact.

Therefore, always deactivate the passenger

side airbag when a rearward facing child

restraint system is installed on the front

passenger seat. The front passenger seat

must also be positioned back as far as

possible in order to prevent the child

restraint system from coming into contact

with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate

the passenger airbag as soon as the child

restraint system has been removed.

93) To deactivate the airbags using the

instrument panel menu, see the description

in the "Knowing the instrument panel"

chapter, "Menu Options" paragraph.

94) Do not affix rigid objects to the

garment hooks or support handles.

95) Do not rest your head, arms or elbows

on the door, windows or the area in which

the Window bag is located to avoid

possible injury during airbag inflation.

96) Never lean your head, arms or elbows

out of the window.

97) If, when the ignition device is turned to

MAR, the

warning light does not switch

on or stays on whilst driving, a fault may

have occurred in the restraint systems. In

this case the airbags or pretensioners may

not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower

number of cases, they may be deployed

accidentally. Contact a Fiat Dealership

immediately to have the system checked.

98) In some versions, in case of a LED

failure (located on the plate of the

instrument panel), the

warning light on

the instrument panel turns on and the

passenger side airbags are deactivated.

99) On cars with side bags, do not cover

the front seat backrests with extra covers.

100) Do not travel carrying objects in your

lap, in front of your chest or between your

lips (pipe, pencils, etc.): they could cause

severe injury if the airbag is deployed.

101) If the car has been stolen or in the

case of attempt to steal it, if it has been

subjected to vandalism or floods, have the

airbag system checked by a Fiat

Dealership.

102) If the ignition device is at MAR, even if

the engine is switched off, airbags may be

deployed when the vehicle is stationary

and hit by another vehicle. Therefore, even

if the vehicle is stationary, when an active

front passenger airbag is fitted, DO NOT

install rearward facing child restraint

systems on the front passenger seat.

Deployment of the airbag following an

impact could cause fatal injuries to the

child. Therefore, always deactivate the

passenger side airbag when a rearward

facing child restraint system is installed on

the front passenger seat. The front

passenger seat must also be positioned

back as far as possible in order to prevent

the child restraint system from coming into

contact with the dashboard. Immediately

reactivate the passenger airbag as soon as

the child restraint system has been

removed. Also remember that, if the

ignition device is set to STOP, none of the

safety devices (airbags or pretensioners)

will be deployed in the event of collision.

Non-deployment in such cases does not

indicate a system malfunction.

103) Malfunction of the

warning light is

indicated by the activation of an airbag

failure symbol and a dedicated message

on the instrument panel display (or, for

versions where provided, by the activation

of a blinking generic failure warning light).

The pyrotechnic charges are not disabled.

Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to

have the system checked.

104) The airbag deployment threshold is

higher than that of the pretensioners. For

collisions in the range between the two

thresholds, it is normal for only the

pretensioners to be activated.

106

SAFETY

105) The airbag does not replace seat

belts but increases their efficiency.

Because front airbags are not deployed for

low-speed crashes, side collisions,

rear-end shunts or rollovers, occupants are

protected, in addition to any side bags,

only by their seat belts, which must

therefore always be fastened.

107

STARTING AND DRIVING

Let’s get to the core of the vehicle:

seeing how you can exploit all of its

potential to the full.

We’ll look at how to drive it safely in any

situation, so that it can be a welcome

companion, with our comfort and our

wallets in mind.

STARTING THE ENGINE .......109

PARKING THE VEHICLE........110

PARKING BRAKE ............110

USING THE TRANSMISSION . . . .111

STOP/START SYSTEM ........111

SPEED LIMITER .............113

ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL .114

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL

(ACC)....................116

PARKING SENSORS ..........123

REAR VIEW CAMERA .........125

TOWING TRAILERS ..........127

REFUELLING THE VEHICLE .....128

108

STARTING AND DRIVING

STARTING THE

ENGINE

Before starting the engine, adjust the

seat, the interior rear view mirrors, the

door mirrors and fasten the seat belt

correctly.

Never press the accelerator pedal for

starting the engine.

If necessary, messages indicating the

starting procedure can be shown on

the display.

ENGINE STARTING

PROCEDURE

106) 107) 108) 109)

37) 38) 39) 40)

Proceed as follows:

engage the parking brake and place

the gear lever in neutral;

fully depress the clutch pedal

without touching the accelerator;

only for diesel versions, bring the

ignition device to MAR, warning light

will come on in the instrument

panel and wait for the warning light to

switch off;

turn the ignition device to AVV and

release it as soon as the engine starts;

if the engine does not start within

10 seconds, bring the ignition device

back to STOP and wait for

10-15 seconds before repeating the

starting procedure;

after the manoeuvre has been

repeated, if the problem persists,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

106) Do not try to start the engine pouring

fuel or other flammable fluid inside the

throttle body air intake: this might damage

the engine and injury people nearby.

107) It is dangerous to run the engine in

enclosed areas. The engine takes in

oxygen and releases carbon dioxide,

carbon monoxide and other toxic gases.

108) The brake servo is not active until the

engine is started, so you would need to

apply much more force than usual to the

brake pedal.

109) Do not start the engine by pushing,

towing or driving downhill. These

manoeuvres may damage the catalytic

converter.

IMPORTANT

37) We recommend that during the initial

period, or during the first 1600 km, you do

not drive to full car performance (e.g.

excessive acceleration, long journeys at top

speed, sharp braking, etc.).

38) When the engine is switched off never

leave the ignition device in the MAR

position to prevent useless current

absorption from draining the battery.

39) A quick burst on the accelerator before

turning off the engine serves absolutely no

practical purpose; it wastes fuel and is

especially damaging to turbocharged

engines.

40) Warning light

will flash after starting

or during prolonged cranking to indicate a

fault with the glow plug heating system. If

the engine starts, the vehicle can be used

as normal, but a Fiat Dealership must be

contacted as soon as possible.

109

PARKING THE

VEHICLE

When parking and leaving the car,

proceed as follows:

engage a gear (1

gear if facing

uphill or reverse if facing downhill) and

leave the wheels turned;

stop the engine and engage the

handbrake;

always remove the ignition key.

Block the wheels with a wedge or a

stone if the car is parked on a steep

slope.

IMPORTANT NEVER leave the vehicle

with the gearbox in neutral.

PARKING BRAKE

110) 111)

To engage the handbrake, pull lever 1

fig. 116 upwards until the car is

secured.

The

warning light will come on in

the instrument panel.

To disengage it, raise lever 1 slightly,

hold down button 2 and lower the lever

1, checking that the warning light

on the instrument panel switches

off.

WARNING

110) Never leave children unattended in

the car. Always remove the key from the

ignition when leaving the car and take it

with you.

111) For cars equipped with a front

armrest, lift it up to ensure that it does not

interfere with the action of the handbrake.

116

07046J0001EM

110

STARTING AND DRIVING

USING THE

TRANSMISSION

112)

41)

To engage the gears, press the clutch

pedal fully and put the gear lever into

the required position (the diagram for

gear engagement is shown on the knob

To engage 6

gear (if present), operate

the lever by pressing it towards the right

in order to avoid engaging 4

gear by

mistake. The same applies to the shift

from 6

to 5

gear.

1.3 Multijet 95 HP versions:To

engage reverse gear R from neutral,

press the clutch pedal and

simultaneously move the lever to the

right and then backwards.

1.4 95 HP versions: To engage

reverse R from neutral, lift the ring 1

fig. 117 under the knob and at the

same time move the lever to the right

and then backwards.

1.4 T–jet 120 HP — 1.6 Multijet

120 HP versions: To engage reverse R

from neutral, lift the ring 1

fig. 117 under the knob and at the

same time move the lever to the left

and then forwards.

IMPORTANT Reverse can only be

engaged when the vehicle is completely

stationary.

WARNING

112) Depress the clutch pedal fully to

change gear correctly. It is therefore

essential that there is nothing under the

pedals: make sure the mats are lying flat

and do not get in the way of the pedals.

IMPORTANT

41) Do not drive with your hand resting on

the gear lever as the force exerted, even if

slight, could lead over time to premature

wear of the gearbox internal components.

STOP/START

SYSTEM

(where provided)

The Start&Stop system automatically

stops the engine each time the vehicle

is stationary and starts it again when

the driver wants to move off.

In this way, the vehicle efficiency is

increased, by reducing consumption,

dangerous gas emissions and sound

pollution.

OPERATING MODE

Stopping the engine

With the vehicle stopped, the engine

stops with gearbox in neutral and clutch

pedal released.

Restarting the engine

To restart the engine, press the clutch

pedal or the accelerator pedal.

SYSTEM MANUAL

ACTIVATION/

DEACTIVATION

To activate/deactivate the system

manually, press the fig. 118 button

located on the dashboard in central

position.

117

07056J0001EM

111

System activation

Activation of the system is indicated by

the

warning light switching on and,

where provided, by a message on the

display.

System deactivation

Deactivation of the system is indicated

by the

warning light switching on

and, where provided, by a message on

the display.

MISSED ENGINE

STOPPING CONDITIONS

42)

When the system is active, for a higher

comfort and safety, and to reduce

emissions, the engine does not stop in

some conditions, such as:

engine still cold;

especially cold outside temperature;

battery not sufficiently charged;

particulate filter (DPF) regeneration in

progress (Diesel engines only);

driver's door not shut;

driver's seat belt not fastened;

reverse gear engaged (e.g. for

parking manoeuvres);

only for versions equipped with an

automatic climate control, if an

adequate level of thermal comfort has

not been reached or with MAX-DEF

function active;

during the first period of use, to

initialise the system.

ENGINE RESTARTING

CONDITIONS

Due to comfort, emission control and

safety reasons, the engine can restart

automatically without any action by the

driver, when the car and the passenger

compartment climate control system

are in certain conditions, such as:

With gear engaged, automatic engine

restarting is possible only by fully

pressing the clutch pedal.

SAFETY FUNCTIONS

When the engine is stopped through

the Stop/Start system, if the driver

releases their seat belt or opens the

driver's or passenger's door, the engine

can be restarted only by using the

ignition device.

This condition is indicated to the driver

both through a buzzer and a message

on the display.

"ENERGY SAVING"

FUNCTION

If, following the automatic engine

restarting, the driver does not carry out

any action for more than 3 minutes, the

Stop/Start system stops the engine

definitely, to prevent fuel consumption.

In these cases, the engine can only be

restarted using the ignition device.

NOTE In any case, it is possible to keep

the engine running by deactivating the

system.

IRREGULAR OPERATION

In the event of malfunction, the

Stop/Start system is deactivated.

For failure indications, see the "Warning

lights and messages" paragraph,

"Knowing the instrument panel"

chapter.

VEHICLE INACTIVITY

113)

In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the

battery is replaced), special attention

must be paid to the disconnection of

the battery power supply.

118

P2000024-000-000

112

STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

113) If the battery needs to be replaced,

always contact a Fiat Dealership. Replace

the battery with a new one of the same

type and specifications.

IMPORTANT

42) If the climate comfort is to be favoured,

the Start&Stop system can be deactivated,

for a continuous operation of the climate

control system.

SPEED LIMITER

DESCRIPTION

This device allows the speed of the

vehicle to be limited to values which

can be set by the driver.

The maximum speed can be set both

with vehicle stationary and in motion.

The minimum speed that can be set is

30 km/h.

When the device is active, the vehicle

speed depends on the pressure at the

accelerator pedal, until the

programmed speed limit is reached

(see "Speed limit programming"

paragraph).

ACTIVATING THE DEVICE

To activate the device press button 1

fig. 119 on the steering wheel.

The activation of the device is indicated

by the

symbol on the display, along

with a dedicated message and the last

speed value stored.

If the electronic Cruise Control has been

activated previously, button 1

fig. 119 must be pressed twice. The

first press switches off the function

activated previously; the second press

activates the Speed Limiter.

SPEED LIMIT

PROGRAMMING

The speed limit can be programmed

without necessarily activating the

device.

To store a speed value higher than the

displayed one, briefly press the SET +

button. Each time the button is

pressed, the speed increases by about

1 km/h while keeping the button

pressed, the speed increases by

5 km/h intervals.

To store a speed value lower than the

displayed one, press the SET – button.

Each time the button is pressed, the

speed decreases by about 1 km/h

while keeping the button pressed, the

speed decreases by 5 km/h intervals.

119

P2000034-000-000

113

DEVICE ACTIVATION/

DEACTIVATION

Device Activation: press the SET + or

SET – buttons, at a speed between

30 and 130 km/h, to set the current car

speed as the speed limit. Or, press the

RES (Resume) button to set the speed

limit to the value shown on the display. .

The device activation is indicated by the

symbol on the display.

Device deactivation: press the CANC

button. The device deactivation is

indicated by the grey

symbol on the

display.

EXCEEDING THE

PROGRAMMED SPEED

By fully depressing the accelerator

pedal, the programmed speed can be

exceeded even with the device active

(e.g. in the event of overtaking).

The device is disabled until the speed

drops below the set limit, after which it

reactivates automatically.

FLASHING OF

PROGRAMMED SPEED

The programmed speed flashes in the

following cases:

when the accelerator pedal has been

fully depressed and the vehicle has

exceeded the programmed speed;

activating the system after setting a

limit below the effective speed of the

vehicle;

when the device cannot reduce the

speed of the vehicle due to the gradient

of the road, in this case also

accompanied by an acoustic warning;

in the event of sharp acceleration.

DEACTIVATING THE

DEVICE

To deactivate the device press button 1

fig. 119.

IMPORTANT The activation of the

electronic Cruise Control will deactivate

the device.

Automatic deactivation of the

device

The device deactivates automatically in

the event of fault in the system. In this

case, contact a Fiat Dealership.

ELECTRONIC

CRUISE CONTROL

(where provided)

This is an electronically controlled

driving assistance device that allows the

desired vehicle speed to be maintained,

without having to press the accelerator

pedal. This device can be used at a

speed above 30 km/h on long stretches

of dry, straight roads with few variations

(e.g. motorways).

It is therefore not recommended to use

this device on extra-urban roads with

traffic. Do not use it in town.

ACTIVATING THE DEVICE

114) 115) 116)

To activate the device press button 1

fig. 120.

The grey symbol

on the instrument

panel switches on to signal that the

device has been activated.

114

STARTING AND DRIVING

The device cannot be engaged in 1

or reverse gear: it is advisable to

engage it in 3

gear or higher.

SETTING THE DESIRED

SPEED

Proceed as follows:

to activate the device press button 1

fig. 120;

when the vehicle has reached the

desired speed, press button SET + (or

SET –) and release it to activate the

device. When the accelerator is

released, the vehicle will keep the

selected speed automatically.

With the system set, the symbol (

)

is white.

If needed (e.g. when overtaking), you

can increase speed simply by pressing

the accelerator; when you release the

pedal, the vehicle goes back to the

speed stored previously.

When travelling downhill with the device

active, the vehicle speed may exceed

the set one.

CHANGING SPEED

Increasing speed

Once the electronic Cruise Control has

been activated, the speed can be

increased by pressing button SET +.

Keeping the button pressed, the set

speed will increase until the button is

released, then the new speed will be

stored. Perform this operation only if

you want to increase vehicle speed by a

high value.

Each time button SET + is pressed the

set speed will be fine tuned.

Decreasing speed

With the device activated, the speed

can be decreased by pressing button

SET–.

Keeping the button pressed, the set

speed will decrease until the button is

released, then the new speed will be

stored.

Each time button SET – is pressed the

set speed will be fine tuned.

RECALLING THE SPEED

Before returning to the previously set

speed, you must bring the speed close

to that value, press the RES (Resume)

button and then release it.

DEACTIVATING THE

DEVICE

Lightly pressing the brake pedal or

pressing the CANC button deactivates

the electronic Cruise Control without

deleting the stored speed.

The Cruise Control may be deactivated

also by applying the parking brake,

when the braking system is operated

(e.g. operation of the ESC system) or by

pressing the clutch pedal while shifting

gear.

The stored speed is deleted in the

following cases:

pressing button 1 fig. 120 or

switching off the engine;

if there is a malfunction in the

electronic Cruise Control.

DEACTIVATING THE

DEVICE

The electronic Cruise Control is

deactivated by pressing button 1

fig. 120 or bringing the ignition device

to STOP.

WARNING

114) When travelling with the device active,

never move the gear lever to neutral.

115) In case of a malfunction or failure of

the device, contact a Fiat Dealership.

120

07126J0002EM

115

116) The electronic Cruise Control can be

dangerous if the system cannot keep a

constant speed. In specific conditions

speed may be excessive, resulting in the

risk of losing control of the vehicle and

causing accidents. Do not use the device

in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snowy or

slippery roads.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL (ACC)

(where provided)

117) 118) 119) 120) 121) 122)

43) 44) 45) 47) 47) 48) 49)

DESCRIPTION

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a

driver assist device which combines the

Cruise Control functions with one for

controlling the distance from the vehicle

ahead.

The device allows to hold the vehicle at

the desired speed without needing to

press the accelerator. It also allows to

hold a given distance from the vehicle

ahead (the distance can be set by the

driver).

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses

a radar sensor, located behind the front

bumper fig. 121, to detect the presence

of a vehicle close ahead.

The device further enhances driving

comfort provided by the electronic

Cruise Control when on the motorway

or out of town with light traffic.

The use of the device is therefore not

advantageous on busy roads or in

town.

IMPORTANT NOTES

If the sensor does not detect any

vehicle ahead, the device will maintain a

fixed set speed.

If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead,

the device automatically intervenes by

braking (or accelerating) slightly in order

not to exceed the original set speed, so

that the vehicle keeps the preset

distance, seeking to adapt to the speed

of the vehicle ahead.

It is advisable to turn the device off in

the following cases:

driving in fog, heavy rain, snow,

heavy traffic and in complex driving

situations (e.g. on motorways with

roadworks in progress);

driving near a bend (winding roads),

icy, snowy, slippery roads or with steep

climbs and descents;

entering a turn lane or on a slip road;

towing a trailer;

when circumstances do not allow

safe driving at a constant speed.

There are two operating modes:

121

P2000076-000-000

116

STARTING AND DRIVING

“Adaptive Cruise Control” mode

to hold an appropriate distance

between vehicles (a dedicated message

is shown on the instrument panel

display);

electronic “Cruise Control” mode

to hold the vehicle at a constant

preset speed.

To change the operation mode, use the

button on the steering wheel (see that

described on the following pages).

The "electronic Cruise Control" does

not vary the speed according to the

presence or not of vehicles ahead.

Always adjust the speed according to

traffic conditions.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE

CONTROL ACTIVATION/

DEACTIVATION

Activation

To activate the device, press and

release the button

fig. 122.

With the device activated and ready to

work, the display shows a message

indicating the "readiness" of the system

and a dedicated grey symbol (as shown

in fig. 123 ).

IMPORTANT It is dangerous to leave

the device activated when it is not

used. There is a risk of inadvertently

activating it and losing control of the

vehicle due to unexpected excessive

speed.

Deactivation

With the device active, to deactivate it

press and release the button

. The

display will show a dedicated message.

SETTING THE DESIRED

SPEED

The device can only be set with the

speed over 30 km/h (or equivalent

in mph) and under 160 km/h (or

equivalent in mph). When the vehicle

reaches the desired speed, press and

release the button SET + or SET – the

display will show the set speed.

With the system set, the relative symbol

(fig. 123 ) is white.

Then take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

IMPORTANT Pressing the accelerator

pedal again, the car’s speed may

exceed the set value.

While the accelerator pedal is pressed:

a dedicated message is displayed for

a few seconds;

the device will not be able to control

the distance between the vehicle and

the one ahead. In this case the speed

will be determined only by the position

of the accelerator pedal.

The device will return to normal

operation as soon as the accelerator

pedal is released.

122

P2000060-000-000

123

P2000077-000-000

117

The system cannot be set:

when pressing the brake pedal;

when the manual parking brake has

been operated;

when the brakes are overheated;

when the gear lever is in R (reverse),

neutral or in 1st (first gear engaged);

when the clutch is pressed;

when the vehicle speed is not within

the settable speed range;

when the engine rpm is above a

maximum threshold or below a

minimum threshold;

when the ESC (or ABS or other

stability control systems) are operating

or have just operated;

during automatic braking by the Full

Brake Control system;

when the Speed Limiter is active;

when the electronic Cruise Control is

active;

in case of failure of the device;

when the engine is off;

in case of obstruction of the radar

sensor (in this case the bumper area

where it is located must be cleaned).

In case of system set, the conditions

described above also cause a

cancellation or deactivation of the

system with times that may vary

according to the conditions.

IMPORTANT With the device set, it is

possible to reach speeds higher than

those set in the system (or equivalent

in mph) by pressing the accelerator

pedal. In this situation, the device does

not turn off automatically, but the

device’s functions are limited: it is

therefore recommended to turn it off.

CHANGING SPEED

Increasing speed

After having set the device, the stored

speed can be stored by holding the

SET + button pressed.

Press the SET + button once, the set

speed will increase by 1 km/h (or the

equivalent in mph). Each subsequent

touch of the button will increase the

speed by 1 km/h (or the equivalent

in mph).

Hold the SET + button down, the set

speed will increase in 10 km/h steps (or

the equivalent in mph) until the button is

released. The set speed increase is

shown on the display.

Decreasing speed

After having set the device, the stored

speed can be reduced by holding the

SET –. button down.

Press the SET – button once, the set

speed will decrease by 1 km/h (or the

equivalent in mph). Each subsequent

touch of the button will reduce the

speed by 1 km/h (or the equivalent

in mph).

Hold the SET – button down, the set

speed will decrease in 10 km/h steps

(or the equivalent in mph) until the

button is released. The set speed

decrease is shown on the display.

IMPORTANT NOTES

By keeping the accelerator pedal

depressed, the vehicle can continue to

accelerate beyond the set speed. In this

case, press SET + (or SET–)tosetthe

speed to the current speed of the

vehicle.

When the SET – button is pressed to

reduce the speed, the braking system

intervenes automatically if the engine

brake does not slow the vehicle down

sufficiently to reach the set speed.

The device holds the set speed uphill

and downhill; however a slight variation

is entirely normal, particularly on slight

gradients.

Gears can be shifted during operation

of the device to allow to select the gear

suited to the set speed and keep the

device set. The device is cancelled

when you press and hold the clutch

pedal down or putting the gear lever in

the neutral position for more than a

certain time limit.

The device is switched off while driving

if the brakes overheat.

118

STARTING AND DRIVING

ACCELERATING WHEN

OVERTAKING

When driving with the device active and

following a vehicle, the device provides

additional acceleration to facilitate

overtaking, when travelling over a given

speed and switches on the left direction

indicator (of the right indicator for

right-hand drive versions).

In left-hand traffic, the overtaking assist

function is only active when the

left-hand lane is used for overtaking the

vehicle ahead (the opposite activation

logic is used in right-hand traffic

countries).

The device detects the direction of

traffic automatically when the vehicle

passes from left-hand traffic to

right-hand traffic. In this case, the

overtaking assist function is only active

when the reference vehicle is overtaken

on the right.

The additional acceleration is activated

when the driver uses the right direction

indicator.

In this condition, the device no longer

provides the overtaking assist function

on the left-hand side until it determines

that the vehicle has returned to

left-hand traffic conditions.

RECALLING THE SPEED

Once the system has been cancelled

but not deactivated, if a speed was

previously set simply press the RES

(Resume) button and remove your foot

from the accelerator to recall it.

The system will be set to the last stored

speed.

Before returning to the previously set

speed, bring the speed close to that

value, press the RES (Resume) button

and then release it.

IMPORTANT The recall function must

only be used if the road and traffic

conditions so allow. Recalling an

excessively high or low speed for the

current traffic and road conditions could

cause an acceleration or a deceleration

of the vehicle. Failure to comply with

these precautions may cause serious

accidents and fatal injuries.

SETTING THE DISTANCE

BETWEEN VEHICLES

The distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar

(short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long),

4 bars (maximum) (see fig. 124 ).

The distances from the vehicle ahead

are proportional to speed. The interval

of time with respect to the vehicle

ahead remains constant and varies

from 1 second (for the short distance

1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (for the

maximum distance 4-bar setting).

The set distance is shown on the

display with a symbol in the “Driver

Assist” area.

The setting is 4 (maximum) the first time

the device is used. After the distance

has been modified by the driver, the

124

P2000094-000-000

119

new distance will be stored also after

the system is deactivated and

reactivated.

To decrease the distance

Press and release the

button to

decrease the distance setting.

The distance setting decreases by one

bar (shorter) every time the button is

pressed.

The set speed is held if there are no

vehicles ahead. Once the shortest

distance has been reached, a further

press of the button will set the longest

distance.

If a slower vehicle is detected in the

same lane, it will be shown on the

display in the “Driver Assist” area. The

device will automatically adjust the car’s

speed to maintain the set distance,

independently of the set speed.

The vehicle holds the set distance until:

the vehicle ahead accelerates to a

speed higher than the set speed;

the vehicle ahead leaves the lane or

the detection field of the Adaptive

Cruise Control device sensor;

the distance setting is changed;

the Adaptive Cruise Control device is

deactivated/cancelled.

IMPORTANT The maximum breaking

applied by the device is limited. The

driver may apply the brakes in all cases

if needed.

IMPORTANT If the device predicts that

the braking level is not sufficient to hold

the set distance, the driver is warned by

a message indicating that the vehicle

ahead is too close. An acoustic signal is

also emitted. In this case, it is advisable

to brake immediately as necessary to

hold a safe distance from the vehicle

ahead.

IMPORTANT The driver is responsible

for ensuring that there are no

pedestrians, other vehicles or

objectives along the direction of the

vehicle. Failure to comply with these

precautions may cause serious

accidents and injuries.

IMPORTANT The driver is fully

responsible for holding a safe distance

from the vehicle ahead respecting the

highway code in force in the respective

country.

DEACTIVATION

The device is deactivated and the set

speed is cancelled if:

the button is pressed on the

Adaptive Cruise Control;

the button is pressed on the

electronic Cruise Control;

the Speed Limiter button is pressed;

the ignition device is in the STOP

position.

The device is cancelled (the set speed

and distance are stored):

when the CANC button is pressed;

when the conditions shown in the

“Setting the desired speed” paragraph

occur;

when the vehicle speed drops under

the minimum set speed (e.g. in

presence of slow vehicles).

If these conditions occur while the

system is decelerating with respect to a

vehicle ahead, the system could

continue the deceleration, if necessary,

also after it is cancelled or deactivated

within the minimum speed settable on

the system.

SYSTEM LIMITED

OPERATION SIGNAL

If the dedicated message is shown on

the display, a condition limiting the

system operation may have occurred.

The possible cause of this limitation is a

failure.

When the conditions limiting the system

functions end, this will go back to

normal and complete operation. Should

the fault persist, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

120

STARTING AND DRIVING

PRECAUTIONS WHILE

DRIVING

The device may not work correctly in

some driving conditions (see below):

the driver must control the vehicle at all

times.

Towing a trailer

Use of the device is not recommended

while towing a trailer.

Vehicle not aligned

The device may not detect a vehicle

travelling on the same lane but which is

not aligned along the same direction of

travel or a vehicle which is cutting in

from a side lane. Sufficient distance

from the vehicles ahead may not be

guaranteed in these cases.

The non-aligned vehicle can weave in

and out of the driving direction causing

the vehicle to brake or accelerate

unexpectedly.

Steering and curves

On curves fig. 125 with the device set,

it could limit speed and acceleration to

guarantee vehicle stability even if no

vehicles are detected ahead. When

leaving the curve, the device resets the

previously set speed.

IMPORTANT In case of narrow curves,

the performance of the device could be

limited. In this case, it is advisable to

deactivate the device.

Using the device on slopes

When driving on roads with variable

gradient, the device may not detect the

presence of a vehicle on the lane.

Device performance could be limited

according to speed, load, traffic

conditions and gradient steepness.

Lane change

The device may not detect the

presence of a vehicle until it is fully in

your lane.

In this case, sufficient distance from the

vehicle which is changing lane may not

be guaranteed: it is advisable to pay the

utmost attention at all times and be

always ready to press the brakes if

needed.

Small vehicles

Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles

and motorcycles fig. 127 ) travelling

near the outer edges of the lane or

which enter the lane from kerbside are

not detected until they are fully in the

lane.

125

P2000043-000-000

126

P2000045-000-000

121

Sufficient distance from the vehicles

ahead may not be guaranteed in these

cases.

Stationary objects and vehicles

The device cannot detect the presence

of stationary vehicles or objects. For

example, the device will not operate if

the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a

vehicle ahead of that one is standing on

the lane.

Pay the utmost attention at all times

and be always ready to press the

brakes if needed.

Objects and vehicles moving in

opposite or crosswise direction

The device cannot detect the presence

of objects or vehicles travelling in

opposite or crosswise direction

fig. 128 and consequently will not be

operated.

ELECTRONIC CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

Electronic Cruise Control mode is

available for travelling at constant speed

in addition to the Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) mode.

If the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

function is implemented on the vehicle,

the electronic Cruise Control works in

the same manner as the ACC (by

pressing the

button of the Cruise

Control) with the difference that:

it does not hold the distance from the

vehicle ahead;

the device keeps working if the

radar sensor is obstructed.

Before returning to the previously set

speed, bring the speed close to that

value, press the RES (Resume) button

and then release it.

WARNING

117) Pay the utmost attention while driving

at all times and be always ready to press

the brakes if needed.

118) The system is an aid for the driver,

who must always pay full attention while

driving. The responsibility always rests with

the driver, who must take into account the

traffic conditions in order to drive in

complete safety. The driver must always

maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in

front.

119) The device is not activated in

presence of pedestrians, oncoming

vehicles in the opposite direction of travel

or moving in the crosswise direction and

stationary objects (e.g. a vehicle standing

in a queue or a broken down vehicle).

120) The device cannot take account of

road, traffic and weather conditions, and

conditions of poor visibility (e.g. fog).

121) The device cannot take account of

road, traffic and weather conditions, and

conditions of poor visibility (e.g. fog).

122) The device cannot apply the

maximum braking force: the car will not be

stopped completely.

IMPORTANT

43) The system may have limited or absent

operation due to weather conditions such

as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow.

127

P2000044-000-000

128

P2000046-000-000

122

STARTING AND DRIVING

44) The section of the bumper before the

sensor must not be covered with

adhesives, auxiliary headlights or any other

object.

45) Operation can be adversely affected by

any structural change made to the vehicle,

such as a modification to the front

geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load

than the standard load of the vehicle.

46) Incorrect repairs made on the front part

of the vehicle (e.g. bumper, chassis) may

alter the position of the radar sensor, and

adversely affect its operation. Go to a Fiat

Dealership for any operation of this type.

47) Do not tamper nor operate on the radar

sensor. In the event of a sensor failure,

contact a Fiat Dealership.

48) Do not wash with high-pressure jets in

the bumper lower area: in particular do not

operate on the system's electrical

connector.

49) Be careful in the case of repairs and

new paintings in the area around the

sensor (panel covering the sensor on the

left side of the bumper). In the event of a

frontal impact the sensor may automatically

deactivate and display a warning to indicate

that the sensor needs to be repaired. Even

without a malfunction warning, deactivate

the system operation if you think that the

position of the radar sensor has changed

(e.g. due to low-speed frontal impact as

during parking manoeuvres). In these

cases, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the

radar sensor realigned or replaced.

PARKING SENSORS

(where provided)

SENSORS

123)

50) 51) 52)

The parking sensors, located in the rear

bumper fig. 129, are used to detect the

presence of any obstacles near the rear

part of the vehicle.

The sensors warn the driver about the

presence of possible obstacles with an

intermittent acoustic signal and,

depending on the version, also with

visual indications on the instrument

panel display.

Activation

The sensors are automatically activated

when reverse gear is selected. As the

distance from the obstacle behind the

vehicle decreases, the frequency of the

acoustic signal increases.

Acoustic signal

When reverse is engaged and there is

an obstacle behind the vehicle, an

acoustic signal is activated and the

signal varies as the distance of the

obstacle from the bumper varies.

The frequency of the acoustic signal:

increases as the distance between

the vehicle and the obstacle decreases;

becomes continuous when the

distance separating the vehicle from the

obstacle is less than about 30 cm;

is constant if the distance between

the vehicle and the obstacle is

unchanged. If this situation concerns

the side sensors, the signal will stop

after approximately 3 seconds to avoid,

for example, indications in the event of

manoeuvres along a wall.

stops immediately if the distance of

the obstacle increases.

When the system emits the acoustic

signal, the volume of the Uconnect™

system (where provided) is

automatically lowered.

129

P2000007-000-000

123

Detection distances

If several obstacles are detected by the

sensors, only the nearest one is

considered.

Indication on display

The indications regarding the Park

Assist system are shown only if the

"Acoustic signal and display" item in the

"Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ 5"

or 7" HD system (where provided) was

previously selected (for more

information, see the description in the

dedicated chapter).

The system indicates the presence of

an obstacle by displaying a single arc in

one of the possible areas, in

accordance with the distance of the

object and the position in relation to the

vehicle. If the obstacle is detected in the

rear central area, a single arc will be

displayed as the obstacle approaches,

first constant, then flashing, in addition

to an acoustic signal.

FAULT INDICATION

Parking sensor faults, if any, will be

indicated when reverse is engaged by

the switching on of the

symbol on

the instrument panel together with the

message on the display (see

description in the "Warning lights and

messages" paragraph, "Knowing the

instrument panel" chapter).

OPERATION WITH A

TRAILER

The operation of the sensors is

automatically deactivated when the

trailer's electrical connection is inserted

in the vehicle's tow hook socket.

Sensors are reactivated on removing

the trailer's electrical connection.

IMPORTANT NOTES

When parking, take the utmost care

over obstacles that may be above or

under the sensor. Objects close to the

vehicle are not detected under certain

circumstances and could therefore

cause damage to the vehicle or be

damaged.

Some conditions may influence the

performance of the parking system:

reduced sensor sensitivity and a

reduction in the parking assistance

system performance could be due to

the presence of: ice, snow, mud, paint,

etc. on the surface of the sensor;

the sensor may detect a

non-existent obstacle ("echo

interference") due to mechanical

interference, for example when washing

the vehicle, in rain (strong wind), hail;

the signals sent by the sensor can

also be altered by the presence of

ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic

brake systems of trucks or pneumatic

drills) near the vehicle;

parking assistance system

performance can also be influenced by

the position of the sensors, for example

due to a change in the ride setting

(caused by wear to the shock

absorbers, suspension), or by changing

tyres, overloading the vehicle or fitting

specific trims that require the vehicle to

be lowered;

the presence of a tow hook without

trailer, which may interfere with the

correct operation of the parking

sensors;

the presence of adhesives on the

sensors. Therefore, take care not to

place adhesives on the sensors.

WARNING

123) Parking and other potentially

dangerous manoeuvres are, however,

always the driver’s responsibility. When

performing these operations, always make

sure that there are no other people

(especially children) or animals on the route

you want to take. The parking sensors are

an aid for the driver, but the driver must

never allow their attention to lapse during

potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even

those executed at low speeds.

124

STARTING AND DRIVING

IMPORTANT

50) The sensors must be clean of mud,

dirt, snow or ice in order for the system to

operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch

or damage the sensors while cleaning

them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard

cloths. The sensors should be washed

using clean water with the addition of car

shampoo if necessary. When using special

washing equipment such as high pressure

jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors

very quickly keeping the jet more than

10 cm away.

51) Have interventions on the bumper in

the area of the sensors carried out only by

a Fiat Dealership. Interventions on the

bumper that are not carried out properly

may compromise the operation of the

parking sensors

52) Only have the bumpers repainted or

any retouches to the paintwork in the area

of the sensors carried out by a Fiat

Dealership. Incorrect paint application

could affect the operation of the parking

sensors.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

(where provided)

DESCRIPTION

The rear camera 1 fig. 130 is located on

the tailgate.

124)

53)

Camera activation/deactivation

Every time reverse is engaged, the

display fig. 131 shows the area around

the vehicle, as seen by the rear camera.

The images are shown on the display

together with a warning message.

With the “Camera Delay” option active,

when engaging the reverse gear, the

image from the camera will continue to

be displayed for up to 10 seconds after

reverse is disengaged, unless vehicle

speed is higher than 13 km/h, or:

- that the gearbox lever is in neutral;

- the ignition device is in position STOP.

When the gear lever is no longer set to

reverse, a button for deactivating the

display of the image from the camera

appears on the Uconnect™ 5" or 7"

HD system display along with the

images behind the vehicle, if the

"Camera Delay" setting is active on the

Uconnect™ 5" or 7" HD system.

NOTE The displayed image may look a

bit distorted.

130

P2000016-000-000

131

07186J0002EM

125

SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE DISPLAY

If activated, using the Uconnect™ 5" or 7" HD system settings, it is possible to activate the guidelines on the display. If

activated, the grid is positioned on the image to highlight the width of the vehicle and the expected reversing path in

accordance with the steering wheel position.

A superimposed central broken line indicates the centre of the vehicle to facilitate parking manoeuvres or tow hook alignment.

The various coloured areas indicate the distance from the rear of the vehicle.

The table below shows the approximate distances for each area fig. 131:

Area Distance from the rear of the vehicle

Red (1) 0–30 cm

Yellow (2) 30–100 cm

Green (3) 1 m or more

126

STARTING AND DRIVING

IMPORTANT NOTES

IMPORTANT In some circumstances,

such as with ice, snow or mud on the

surface of the camera, the camera

sensitivity may be reduced.

IMPORTANT When parking, take the

utmost care over obstacles that may be

above or under the camera range.

WARNING

124) Parking and other potentially

dangerous manoeuvres are, however,

always the driver’s responsibility. While

carrying out these manoeuvres, always

make sure that no people (especially

children) or animals are in the area

concerned. The camera is an aid for the

driver, but the driver must never allow

his/her attention to lapse during potentially

dangerous manoeuvres, even those

executed at low speeds. Always keep a

slow speed, so as to promptly brake in the

case of obstacles.

IMPORTANT

53) It is vital, for correct operation, that the

camera is always kept clean and free from

any mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not

to scratch or damage the camera while

cleaning it. Avoid using dry, rough or hard

cloths. The camera must be washed using

clean water, with the addition of car

shampoo if necessary. In washing stations

which use steam or high-pressure jets,

clean the camera quickly, keeping the

nozzle more than 10 cm away from the

sensors. Also, do not apply stickers to the

camera.

TOWING TRAILERS

IMPORTANT NOTES

125) 126)

For towing caravans or trailers the

vehicle must be fitted with an approved

tow hook and an adequate electrical

system. Should aftermarket installation

be requested, this must be carried out

by specialists.

Install any specific and/or additional

door mirrors as specified by the

Highway Code.

Remember that, when towing a trailer,

steep hills are harder to climb, braking

distances increase and overtaking takes

longer depending on the overall weight

of the trailer.

Engage a low gear when driving

downhill, rather than constantly using

the brake.

The weight the trailer exerts on the

vehicle tow hook reduces the vehicle's

loading capacity by the same amount.

To make sure that the maximum

towable weight is not exceeded (given

in the vehicle registration document)

account should be taken of the fully

laden trailer, including accessories and

luggage.

127

Do not exceed the speed limits specific

to each country you are driving in, in the

case of vehicles towing trailers. In any

case, the top speed must not exceed

100 km/h.

Any electric brake must be powered

directly by the battery through a cable

with a cross-section of no less than

2.5 mm

In addition to the electrical branches,

the vehicle electrical system can only be

connected to the supply cable for an

electric brake and to the cable for an

internal light for the trailer, not

exceeding 15 W. For connections, use

the preset control unit with a battery

cable with section not less than 2.5 mm

IMPORTANT The use of auxiliary loads

other than external lights (e.g. electric

brake) must take place with engine

running.

INSTALLING A TOW

HOOK

To install a tow hook contact a Fiat

Dealership.

WARNING

125) The ABS with which the car is

equipped will not control the braking

system of the trailer. Particular caution is

required on slippery roads.

126) Never modify the braking system of

the vehicle to control the trailer brake. The

trailer braking system must be fully

independent of the car’s hydraulic system.

REFUELLING THE

VEHICLE

127) 128) 129)

Before refuelling, make sure that the

fuel type is correct.

Also stop the engine before refuelling.

PETROL ENGINES

Only use 95 R.O.N. unleaded petrol (EN

228 specifications).

DIESEL ENGINES

54)

Only use Diesel for motor vehicles

(EN590 specification).

When using or parking the vehicle for a

long time in the mountains or cold

areas, it is advisable to refuel using

locally available Diesel. In this case, it is

also advisable to keep the tank over

50% full.

REFUELLING CAPACITY

To ensure that you fill the tank

completely, top up twice after the first

click of the fuel supply gun.

Further top-ups could cause faults in

the fuel feeding system.

128

STARTING AND DRIVING

REFUELLING

PROCEDURE

Diesel and petrol versions

"Capless Fuel" is a device at the

opening for the fuel tank which opens

and recloses automatically when the

fuel supply gun is introduced/removed.

The "Capless Fuel" device is provided

with an inhibitor which prevents

refuelling with incorrect fuel.

Opening the flap

To refuel proceed as follows:

unlock flap 1 fig. 132 by pressing on

the specified point and then open it;

introduce the dispenser in the filler

and refuel;

after refuelling, before removing the

dispenser, wait for at least 10 seconds

in order for the fuel to flow inside the

tank;

then remove the dispenser from the

filler and close flap 1.

The flap is provided with a dust cover

gaiter 2 which prevents deposits of

impurities and dust at the end of the

filler when the flap is closed.

Emergency refuelling

If there is no fuel in the vehicle or the

supply circuit is completely empty,

proceed as follows to reintroduce fuel

to the tank:

open the boot and take adaptor 3

fig. 133, located in the tool box or in the

Fix&Go kit container (according to the

versions);

open flap 1 fig. 132, as described

previously;

introduce the adaptor in the filler as

shown and refuel;

after refuelling, remove the adapter

and close the flap;

finally refit the adaptor in the luggage

compartment.

Versions with LPG system

The gas filler is located next to the

petrol filler cap. It has a "non return",

located in the filler body itself.

132

07206J0001EM

133

07206J0002EM

129

To access the filler 2 fig. 134 open the

access flap 1.

Observe the following precautions

during the refuelling operation:

switch off the engine;

apply the handbrake;

ignition key turned to the OFF

position;

do not smoke;

hand the special adapter over to the

qualified LPG refuelling personnel.

IMPORTANT Depending on the country,

there are various types of adapters for

the refuelling pump. Adapter 1 fig. 135,

supplied with the car and located in a

special case, is specifically designed for

the country in which the car is sold. If

you are in a different country, find out

what type of adapter is used there.

IMPORTANT Before refuelling with LPG,

the qualified personnel must make sure

that the adapter is correctly screwed

onto the filler.

IMPORTANT Look after the LPG

adapter carefully so that it does not get

damaged.

IMPORTANT Only use LPG for motor

vehicles.

WARNING

127) Do not apply any object/plug to the

end of the filler which is not provided for

the car. The use of non-compliant

objects/plugs could cause a pressure

increase inside the tank, resulting in

dangerous situations.

128) Do not bring naked flames or lit

cigarettes near to the fuel filler: fire risk.

Keep your face away from the fuel filler to

prevent breathing in harmful vapours.

129) Do not use a mobile phone near the

refuelling pump: risk of fire.

IMPORTANT

54) For diesel engines, only use diesel fuel

for motor vehicles in accordance with EN

590 European specifications. The use of

other products or mixtures may damage

the engine beyond repair and consequently

invalidate the warranty, due to the damage

caused. If you accidentally introduce other

types of fuel into the tank, do not start the

engine. Empty the tank. If the engine has

been run for even an extremely limited

amount of time, you must not only drain the

fuel tank, but the rest of the supply circuit

as well.

134

PGL000017

135

PGL000018

130

STARTING AND DRIVING

IN AN EMERGENCY

A punctured tyre or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem may interfere with

our journey.

The pages on emergencies can help

you to deal with critical situations

independently and with calm.

In an emergency we recommend that

you call the freephone number found in

the Warranty Booklet.

It is also possible to call the national or

international universal freephone

number to search for the nearest Fiat

Dealership.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....132

BULB REPLACEMENT ........132

REPLACING FUSES ..........142

CHANGING A WHEEL .........148

FIX&GO AUTOMATIC KIT .......152

JUMP STARTING ............155

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM .......157

TOWING THE VEHICLE ........159

131

HAZARD WARNING

LIGHTS

CONTROL

Press the button fig. 136 to switch the

lights on/off.

When the hazard warning lights are on,

the

and warning lights flash.

IMPORTANT The use of hazard warning

lights is governed by the highway code

of the country you are driving in:

comply with legal requirements.

Emergency braking

In the event of emergency braking the

hazard warning lights switch on

automatically as well as warning lights

and in the instrument panel.

The lights switch off automatically when

emergency braking ceases.

BULB

REPLACEMENT

130) 131) 132)

55)

GENERAL

INSTRUCTIONS

Before replacing a bulb check the

contacts for oxidation;

replace blown bulbs with others of

the same type and power;

after replacing a headlight bulb,

always check its alignment;

when a light is not working, check

that the corresponding fuse is intact

before changing the bulb. For the

location of fuses, refer to the paragraph

"If a fuse blows" in this chapter.

IMPORTANT When the weather is cold

or damp or after heavy rain or washing,

the surface of headlights or rear lights

may steam up and/or form drops of

condensation on the inside. This is a

natural phenomenon due to the

difference in temperature and humidity

between the inside and the outside of

the glass which does not indicate a

fault and does not compromise the

normal operation of lighting devices.

The mist disappears quickly when the

lights are turned on, starting from the

centre of the diffuser, extending

progressively towards the edges.

136

P2000021-000-000

132

IN AN EMERGENCY

TYPES OF BULBS

The vehicle is equipped with the following bulbs

Glass bulbs (type 1): they are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-type bulbs (type 2): to remove them from their holder,

press the bulb and turn it anticlockwise, then extract it.

Halogen bulbs (type 3): to remove the bulb, pull the connector and

extract it.

Halogen bulbs (type 4): to remove the bulb, turn it anticlockwise.

133

Light bulbs Type Power Figure reference

Daytime running lights (DRL) (versions with polyelliptical

headlights)

LED – –

Front side lights/Daytime running lights (DRL) (versions with

bi-parabolic headlights)

H15 15W 4

Main beam headlights (versions with polyelliptical headlights) H7 55W 3

Main beam headlights (versions with bi-parabolic headlights) H15 55W 4

Dipped headlights H7 55W 3

Front direction indicators PY21W 21W 2

Side direction indicators WY5W 5W 1

Number plate W5W 5W 1

Rear side/brake light P21W 21W 2

Rear direction indicators PY21W 21W 2

Reversing light W16W 16W 1

3rd stop LED – –

Fog lights H11 55W 4

Rear fog light W16W 16W 1

Front ceiling light C5W 5W 1

Front roof lights (sun visors) C5W 5W 1

Rear ceiling light C5W 6W 1

Luggage compartment light W5W 5W 1

Glove compartment light W5W 5W 1

134

IN AN EMERGENCY

REPLACING AN

EXTERNAL BULB

Versions with polyelliptical

headlights

Front bulb position

1. Dipped beam headlights

2. Fog lights

3. Main beam headlights

4. Daytime running lights (DRL)

5. Direction indicators

133)

Dipped beam headlights

To replace the bulb 1fig. 137, proceed

as follows:

working from inside the engine

compartment, remove rubber

protection cap 1 fig. 138;

disconnect the electrical connector,

then release the retainer clip;

replace bulb 2;

reconnect the electrical connector

and reconnect the lamp-connector

assembly in its housing;

re-engage the retainer clip, making

sure that it is secured;

refit the rubber cap 1.

Main beam headlights

To replace the bulb 3 fig. 137, proceed

as follows:

working from inside the engine

compartment, remove rubber

protection cap 2 fig. 139;

extract the lamp-electrical connector

assembly;

disconnect the electrical connector

3 and replace the bulb 4;

reinsert the lamp-electrical connector

assembly in its housing, making sure

that it is blocked properly.

Front direction indicators

To replace the bulb 5 fig. 137, proceed

as follows:

using the screwdriver provided with

the car, remove the five fasteners

indicated by the arrows fig. 140 and

remove the cover 1;

turn the bulb-bulb holder assembly

2 anticlockwise by a 1/4 turn and

extract it;

replace lamp 3 by pressing it lightly

(axially) and simultaneously turning it

anticlockwise (bayonet fitting);

137

P1030127-000-000

138

P1030234-000-000

139

P1030234-000-001

135

reinsert the bulb-bulb holder

assembly in its housing, then turn the

assembly 2 clockwise, making sure that

it is blocked.

Front fog lamps

To replace the bulb 2 fig. 137, proceed

as follows:

steer the vehicle wheels inwards;

undo screw 1 fig. 141 using the

screwdriver provided and remove

inspection flap 2;

turn the bulb-bulb holder assembly

3 anticlockwise by a 1/4 turn and

extract it;

disconnect the electrical connector

and replace the complete assembly;

reconnect the electrical connector to

the new bulb-bulb holder assembly;

fit the assembly in its housing,

turning it clockwise and making sure

that it is blocked properly;

finally, refit the inspection flap 1.

Daytime running lights (DRL)

The daytime running light bulbs 4

fig. 137 are LED to increase their

lifetime; therefore, they should not

require replacing. Contact the Fiat

Dealership in the event of any kind of

problem.

Side turn light

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

press the lens 1 fig. 142 to compress

in the internal clip 2, then pull the

cluster outwards; take great care not

damage the paintwork;;

turn the bulb holder 2 anticlockwise,

then extract the press-fit bulb 3 and

replace it;

refit the bulb holder 2 in the lens

1 and turn it clockwise;

refit the cluster making sure that the

internal clip clicks into position.

140

P1030194-000-000

141

P2000135

142

P1030251-000-000

136

IN AN EMERGENCY

Versions with bi-parabolic

headlights

Front bulb position

1. Dipped beam headlights

2. Fog lights

3. Main beam headlights / Daytime

running lights (DRL)/ Positions

4. Direction indicator.

Main beam headlights / Daytime

running lights (DRL)/ Positions

To replace the bulb 3 fig. 143, proceed

as follows:

working from inside the engine

compartment, remove rubber cap 1

fig. 144;

rotate the bulb-bulb holder assembly

anticlockwise and extract it;

disconnect the electrical connector

and replace the bulb-bulb holder

assembly 2;

reconnect the electrical connector to

the new assembly;

then insert the assembly in its

housing and turn it clockwise, making

sure that it is locked correctly;

refit the rubber cap 1.

IMPORTANT Only replace the bulb

when the engine is off. Also ensure that

the engine is cold, to prevent the risk of

burns.

Dipped headlights

Right headlight

To replace the bulb 1 fig. 143, proceed

as follows:

steer the vehicle wheels completely

inwards;

adjust the tabs indicated in

fig. 145 and remove the flap;

remove the rubber plug;

disconnect the electrical connector;

extract the bulb, releasing it from the

retaining springs;

replace the new bulb and carry out

the procedure described previously in

reverse.

Left headlight

working from inside the engine

compartment, remove the rubber cap

from the dipped beam headlight bulb 1

fig. 143;

extract the bulb, releasing it from the

retaining springs;

disconnect the electrical connector

and replace the bulb 1 fig. 143;

reconnect the electrical connector to

the new bulb;

143

08026J0002EM

144

08026J0025EM

145

08026J0004EM

137

reposition the assembly in the seat;

refit the rubber cap.

IMPORTANT Only replace the bulb

when the engine is off. Also ensure that

the engine is cold, to prevent the risk of

burns.

Front direction indicators

To replace the bulb 4 fig. 143, proceed

as follows:

using the screwdriver provided with

the car, remove the fasteners indicated

by the arrows and remove the cover 1

fig. 146;

rotate the bulb-bulb holder assembly

anticlockwise;

replace the "bayonet-fitted" bulb;

then insert the bulb-bulb holder

assembly in its housing and turn it

clockwise, making sure that it is locked

correctly;

refit the cover and block it by placing

the fasteners back in position.

Front fog lights

To replace the bulbs, proceed as

follows:

steer the vehicle wheels completely

inwards;

undo screws 1 fig. 141 using the

screwdriver provided and remove

inspection flap 2;

turn the bulb-bulb holder assembly 1

fig. 147 anticlockwise and then remove

it sliding it outwards;

disconnect the electrical connector;

reconnect the connector to the new

assembly: then insert it, turning it

clockwise, ensuring that it locks

correctly;

finally, refit the inspection lid.

Side turn light

To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:

press the lens 1 fig. 148 to compress

in the internal clip 2, then pull the

cluster outwards;

turn the bulb holder 3 anticlockwise,

extract the press-fitted bulb 4 and

replace it;

refit the bulb holder 3 in the lens and

turn it clockwise;

refit the cluster making sure that the

internal clip 2 clicks into position.

146

08026J0011EM

147

08026J0016EM

148

08026J0005EM

138

IN AN EMERGENCY

Rear bulb position

1. Positions

2. Tail lights/Brake lights

3. Turn indicator

4. Reverse gear

Light cluster on tailgate

Tail and reversing lights

To change one or more bulbs, proceed

as follows:

open the tailgate and use the

screwdriver provided to remove the

press-fit inspection flap 1 fig. 150;

disconnect the central electrical

connector;

use the L-shaped key 1 fig. 151 and

the relative hexagonal bushing

2 provided to unscrew the three fixing

nuts 3 and remove the lens unit from

the tailgate;

unscrew the four screws 4

fig. 151 and remove the bulb holder;

to replace the tail light 1 fig. 152,

press it lightly (axially) and

simultaneously turn it anticlockwise

(bayonet fitting);

to replace the reversing light 2,

simply pull the all-glass bulb out of its

holder;

when replaced, refit the bulb holders

into the lens unit and re-tighten the

screws 4 fig. 151;

refit the cluster onto the tailgate and

use the L-shaped key provided 1 and

the relative hexagonal bushing 2 to fully

tighten the three fixing nuts 3;

finally, refit the inspection flap 1

fig. 150, making sure that it is engaged

properly.

149

P1030154-000-000

150

P1030161-000-000

151

P1030165-000-000

152

P1030169-000-000

139

Light cluster on body

Tail/Brake and indicators

To change one or more bulbs, proceed

as follows:

open the tailgate and remove the

press-fit moulding on the body, moving

it upwards A and then to the inside B

as shown in fig. 153;

use the L-shaped key 1

fig. 151 provided, unscrew the two

screws 1 fig. 154 and remove the light

cluster;

disconnect the electrical connector

and unscrew the two screws 2 fig. 155,

then remove the bulb holder 3;

to replace the desired lamp, press it

lightly (axially) and simultaneously turn it

anticlockwise (bayonet fitting); 4 -

tail/brake lights, 5 - direction indicators;

when replaced, refit the bulb holders

into the lens unit and tighten the two

screws 2;

connect the electrical connector, fit

the lens unit on the body and tighten

the two screws 1 fig. 154 using the

L-shaped key 1;

fit the moulding by pressing on it

lightly until you feel it engage properly

with the body, then close the tailgate.

brake lights

The 3rd brake light bulbs are LED to

increase their lifetime; therefore, they

should not require replacing. Contact

the Fiat Dealership in the event of any

kind of problem

Rear fog lights

To replace the rear fog light bulbs,

proceed as follows:

use the screwdriver provided on the

points indicated by the arrows to

rmeove the fasteners 1 and 2, and

remove the flap 3 fig. 156;

access the bulb concerned through

the opening made by removing the flap

3 fig. 157 and disassemble;

insert the new bulb;

153

P2000068-000-000

154

P1030171-000-000

155

P1030172-000-000

156

P2000079-000-000

140

IN AN EMERGENCY

refit the flap 3 properly, inserting the

fasteners 1 and 2 in their seats.

In the event the bulb cannot be

replaced, contact a Fiat Dealership.

Number plate lights

To replace the bulbs, proceed as

follows:

use the screwdriver provided to

remove the lens unit 1 fig. 158;

turn the bulb holder 2

fig. 159 anticlockwise, remove the bulb

3 and replace it;

refit the lens unit, pressing it lightly.

NOTE Before removing the lens unit,

put a protection (e.g. cloth) on the tip of

the screwdriver, in order not to damage

the lens itself.

WARNING

130) Before replacing the bulb, wait for the

exhaust ducts to cool down: DANGER OF

SCALDING!

131) Modifications or repairs to the electric

system that are not carried out properly or

do not take the system technical

specifications into account can cause

malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

132) Halogen bulbs contain pressurised

gas, in the case of breakage they may

burst causing glass fragments to be

projected outwards.

133) Only replace bulbs when the engine is

off. Also ensure that the engine is cold, to

prevent the risk of burns.

IMPORTANT

55) Halogen bulbs must be handled

holding the metallic part only. Touching the

transparent part of the bulb with your

fingers may reduce the intensity of the

emitted light and even reduce the lifespan

of the bulb. In the event of accidental

contact, wipe the bulb with a cloth

moistened with alcohol and let the bulb dry.

157

P2000080-000-000

158

P1030157-000-000

159

08026J0026EM

141

REPLACING FUSES

GENERAL INFORMATION

134) 135) 136) 137)

56)

Fuses protect the electrical system:

they intervene (blow) in the event of a

failure or improper action on the

system.

Fuse extracting pliers

To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked

inside the engine compartment fuse

box cover (see fig. 160 ).

The pliers have two different ends,

specifically designed to remove the

different types of fuses present in the

vehicle.

After use, refit the pliers in position.

FUSE LOCATION

The fuses are grouped in four control

units: on the dashboard, under the

dashboard, in the engine compartment

and inside the boot.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

JUNCTION BOX

57)

The fuse box is located by the side of

the battery fig. 161.

To access the fuses, proceed as

follows:

fully tighten screw 1 fig. 162 using

the screwdriver provided;

160

08036J0002EM

161

08036J0005EM

142

IN AN EMERGENCY

at the same time slowly rotate the

screw anticlockwise, until resistance is

encountered (do not overtighten);

slowly release the screw;

opening is indicated by the entire

screw head coming out of its housing;

remove cover 2, sliding it upwards

on the side guides, as indicated in the

figure.

The number identifying the electrical

component corresponding to each fuse

is shown on the cover.

Once the fuse has been replaced,

proceed as follows:

correctly refit the cover 2 in the side

guides of the casing;

slide it down completely from the

top;

fully tighten screw 1 using the

screwdriver provided;

at the same time slowly rotate the

screw clockwise, until resistance is

encountered (do not overtighten);

slowly release the screw;

closure is indicated by the securing

of the entire screw head in its housing.

DASHBOARD FUSE BOX

Left-hand drive version

The fuse box fig. 164 is located to the

left side of the steering column. To

access the fuses, remove the snap

cover showed in fig. 163, pulling

towards yourself.

Right hand drive version

The control unit fig. 164 is located to

the left side under the dashboard.

To access the control unit, remove the

glove compartment using device 1

fig. 165.

162

08036J0006EM

163

06106J0005EM

164

08036J0009EM

143

UNDER DASHBOARD

CONTROL UNIT

The control unit fig. 166 is located to

the left side under the dashboard.

LUGGAGE

COMPARTMENT FUSE

BOX

Open the tailgate and then move the

section of the inner cover fig. 167 (TIPO

5DOOR version) or fig. 168 (TIPO

STATION WAGON version) and access

the fuses in fuse box 2fig. 169.

165

P2000138

166

P2000083-000-000

167

P1030208-000-000

168

P2000136

169

08036J0011EM

144

IN AN EMERGENCY

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONTROL UNIT

fig. 161

USERS FUSE AMPERE

Two-tone horn F10 15

Heater mirrors F88 7.5

Heated rear window F20 30

Active Grille Shutter F84 5

DASHBOARD FUSE BOX

fig. 164

USERS FUSE AMPERE

Front electric window (driver side) F47 25

Front electric window (passenger side) F48 25

Supply for Uconnect

™ system, Climate Control system, EOBD

system, USB/AUX port, steering wheel controls.

F36 15

Dead Lock device (Driver side door unlocking for

versions/markets, where provided)/Door unlocking/Central

locking/Electric tailgate unlocking

F38 20

Windscreen washer pump F43 20

Rear left electric window F33 25

Rear right electric window F34 25

145

UNDER DASHBOARD CONTROL UNIT

fig. 166

USERS FUSE AMPERE

Front door unlocking (driver side) 1 7.5

Front door unlocking (passenger side) 2 7.5

Rear door unlocking (left) 3 7.5

Rear door unlocking (right) 4 7.5

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FUSE BOX

fig. 169

USERS FUSE AMPERE

Rear 12 V socket F97 15

Driver's front seat heater F99 10

Passenger side front seat heater F92 10

Driver's front seat lumbar adjustment F90 10

WARNING

134) If the replaced fuse blows again, contact a Fiat Dealership.

135) Never replace a fuse with another with a higher amp rating; DANGER OF FIRE

136) If a fuse NOT indicated in this or the previous page is used, contact a Fiat Dealership.

137) Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition device is at STOP, that the key, if mechanical, has been removed and that all devices

are switched off and/or disconnected.

146

IN AN EMERGENCY

IMPORTANT

56) Never replace a fuse with metal wires or anything else.

57) If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment, take care not to directly hit the fuse box and the window wiper motor with the water jet.

147

CHANGING A WHEEL

JACK

Please note that:

the jack weight is 2.15 kg;

the jack cannot be repaired and in

the event of a fault it must be replaced

by another genuine one;

No tool other than its cranking device

may be fitted on the jack.

Servicing

Prevent any dirt from depositing on

the "worm screw";

Keep the "worm screw" lubricated;

Never modify the jack.

Conditions for non-use

Temperatures below −40°C;

On sandy or muddy ground;

On uneven ground;

On steep roads;

In extreme weather conditions:

thunderstorms, typhoons, hurricanes,

blizzards, storms, etc.

In direct contact with the engine or

for repairs under the vehicle;

On boats.

CHANGING PROCEDURE

138) 139) 140) 141) 142)

58) 59)

Proceed as follows:

stop the car in a position that is not

dangerous for oncoming traffic where

you can change the wheel safely. The

ground must be flat and sufficiently

compact;

stop the engine, engage the hazard

warning lights and the parking brake;

engage first gear or reverse;

wear the reflective safety jacket

before getting out of the car (anyway

comply with the laws in force in the

country you are driving in);

open the luggage compartment and

if there is a cargo box (for TIPO 5DOOR

version only), remove it as described in

the “Cargo box” paragraph in the

“Getting to know the car” chapter (for

petrol and diesel versions only);

lift the mat and fix it by the tab to the

fastening device on the parcel shelf

fig. 170 (for TIPO 5DOOR version only);

using the tool 4 in the tool box, undo

the lock nut 1 fig. 171 (for TIPO 5DOOR

version) or fig. 172 (for TIPO STATION

WAGON version);

170

P2000069-000-000

171

P2000059-000-000

148

IN AN EMERGENCY

take out the toolbox 3 and bring it

next to the wheel to be replaced;

take the spare wheel or the

space-saver wheel 2 (for TIPO 5DOOR

version);

for versions with steel rim: remove

the hub cap 1 fig. 173 using the

specific tool 2 fig. 174, located in the

tool container: grip the tool with two

fingers, insert the tongue between tyre

and hub cap and pull towards yourself

perpendicular to the wheel;

take the chock 1 fig. 175 and fold it

out as shown in the diagram;

place the chock 1 on the wheel

diagonally opposite the one to be

replaced (see fig. 176 ) to prevent the

vehicle from moving irregularly when it

is lifted from the ground;

loosen the bolt of the wheel to be

replaced by about one turn with the

wrench provided 1 fig. 177; rock the car

to make it easier to separate the rim

from the wheel hub;

172

P2000125

173

08046J0012EM

174

08046J0013EM

175

08046J0007EM

176

08046J0004EM

149

operate the device 1 fig. 178 to

extend the jack until the top of the jack

2 fits correctly into the side member

3 of the vehicle, next to the

symbol

on the side member;

alert any bystander that the car is

about to be raised; all persons should

be kept away from the car and nobody

must touch it until it has been lowered;

operate the jack handle 1

fig. 178 (clockwise) to operate the jack

and raise the car until the wheel is

raised a few centimetres above the

ground.

loosen the stud bolts completely and

remove the punctured wheel;

make sure the contact surfaces

between spare or space-saver wheel

(for TIPO 5DOOR version) and hub are

clean so that the fastening bolts will not

come loose;

fit the spare or space-saver wheel

(for TIPO 5DOOR version) by inserting

the first bolt for two threads into the

hole closest to the inflation valve and

proceed in the same manner with the

other bolts;

tighten the retaining bolts well using

wrench 1 fig. 177;

turn the jack handle 1

fig. 178 (anticlockwise) to lower the car

and remove the jack;

use the wrench provided to fasten

the bolts completely in a criss-cross

fashion as shown in fig. 180;

for versions with steel rim, fit the hub

cap on the spare wheel: make the

groove 1 fig. 181 provided on the hub

cap and highlighted by symbol

2 coincide with the inflation valve;

177

08046J0005EM

178

08046J0006EM

179

08046J0001EM

180

F1B0225C

181

08046J0010EM

150

IN AN EMERGENCY

place the inner part of the hub cap

on the wheel rim;

engage the hub cap by applying an

axial force in several points as shown in

fig. 182 to allow the correct coupling

between hub cap and wheel.

NOTE The hub cap cannot be fitted to

the space-saver wheel (for TIPO

5DOOR version).

NOTE If replacing a wheel with alloy

rim, stove it temporarily into the spare

wheel compartment with the cosmetic

side facing upwards.

WARNING

138) If left in the passenger compartment,

the punctured wheel and jack constitute a

serious risk to the safety of occupants in

the event of accidents or sharp braking.

Therefore, always place both the jack and

punctured wheel in the dedicated housing

in the boot.

139) It is extremely dangerous to attempt

to change a wheel on the side of the

vehicle next to the driving lane: make sure

that the vehicle is at a sufficient distance

from the road, to avoid being run over.

140) Alert other drivers that the car is

stationary in compliance with local

regulations: hazard warning lights, warning

triangle, etc. Any passengers on board

should leave the car, especially if it is

heavily laden. Passengers should stay

away from on-coming traffic while the

wheel is being changed.

141) The jack is a tool developed and

designed only for changing a wheel, if a

tyre gets punctured or damaged, on the

vehicle with which it is supplied or on other

vehicles of the same model. Any other use,

e.g. to jack up other vehicle models or

different things, is strictly prohibited. Never

use it to carry out maintenance or repairs

under the vehicle or to change

summer/winter wheels and vice versa: we

advise you to contact a Fiat Dealership.

Never go under the raised vehicle: use it

only in the positions indicated. Do not use

the jack for loads higher than the one

shown on its label. Never start the engine

with vehicle raised. If the vehicle is raised

more than necessary, everything can

become more unstable, with the risk of the

vehicle dropping violently. Thus, lift the

vehicle only as needed in order to access

the spare wheel.

142) Never tamper with the inflation valve.

Never introduce tools of any kind between

the rim and the tyre. Check tyre and

space-saver wheel pressures regularly,

complying with the values given in the

"Technical specifications" chapter.

IMPORTANT

58) When turning the jack handle make

sure that it can turn freely without scraping

your hand against the ground. The moving

components of the jack ("worm screw" and

joints) can also cause injuries: avoid

touching them. If you come into contact

with lubricating grease, clean yourself

thoroughly.

182

08046J0011EM

151

59) Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as

possible to have the correct tightening of

the wheel bolts checked.

FIX&GO AUTOMATIC

KIT

(where provided)

DESCRIPTION

143)

60) 61)

The Fix&Go Automatic kit is located in

the luggage compartment fig. 183 (for

TIPO 5DOOR version) or fig. 184 (for

TIPO STATION WAGON version), in its

own case. The container is also

equipped with a screwdriver, the tow

hook and the refuelling adaptor.

In the TIPO 5DOOR version with the

LPG system, the Fix&Go Automatic kit

is located on the left side of the luggage

compartment fig. 185.

In the TIPO STATION WAGON version

with the LPG system, the Fix&Go

Automatic kit is located on the right

side of the luggage compartment

fig. 186.

183

P2000074-000-000

184

P2000124

185

PGL000025

152

IN AN EMERGENCY

The Fix&Go Automatic kit also includes:

one tank 1 fig. 187 containing the

sealing fluid, provided with: filler tube

2 and adhesive label 3 with the writing

"Max. 80 km/h”, to be attached in a

position easily visible to the driver (eg.

on the dashboard) after repairing the

tyre;

compressor 4 complete with

pressure gauge and connectors;

an instruction leaflet, to refer to for

prompt and correct use and that must

be then given to the personnel dealing

with the tyre treated with sealant;

a pair of gloves located in the side

compartment of the compressor;

some adaptors, for inflating different

elements.

TYRE REPAIRING AND

PRESSURE RESTORING

PROCEDURE

143)

60) 61)

Proceed as follows:

place the vehicle in a safe and

suitable area, engaging the parking

brake. Take the kit from the specific

compartment. Remove the adhesive

label of speed 3 fig. 187 and apply it in

a visible position. Wear the protective

gloves provided. Remove the cap from

the valve of the punctured tyre and

connect and firmly tighten the

transparent tube of the sealing fluid 1

fig. 188;

ensure that the on-off button 1

fig. 189 is in 0 (OFF) position. If

provided, open the cover of the

compressor 4 fig. 187 and insert the

electrical connector in the car’s 12V

socket fig. 190, start the car engine;

activate the compressor moving

on-off 1 button to I (ON) position

fig. 189. When the pressure gauge

2 shows the car’s required pressure

(see section “Wheels” under “Technical

data” chapter), switch off the

compressor moving on-off button 1 to

0 position. If after 5 minutes from the

compressor ignition, the pressure

gauge 2 indicates a pressure less than

1.8 bar / 26 psi, switch off the

compressor, disconnect the sealing

fluid tube from the tyre valve, re-screw

the valve cap and move the car about

10 meters to allow the distribution of

sealing fluid in the tyre. Stop the car

186

PGL000026

187

08056J0003EM

188

08056J0004EM

153

safely and repeat the operation above

until the required pressure is reached. If

after other 5 min. from the compressor

ignition, the pressure gauge 2 still

indicates a pressure lower than 1.8 bar

/ 26 psi, the TYRE IS TOO DAMAGED

AND CANNOT BE REPAIRED. Remove

and place the kit in the specific

compartment and contact a Fiat

Dealership;

if the required pressure is reached,

restart driving. Do not exceed 80 km/h.

Avoid sudden acceleration or braking.

After driving for about 8 km / 5 miles,

place the vehicle in a safe and suitable

area, engaging the parking brake. Pick

up the kit, ensure the on-off button 1 is

in 0 position, insert the electrical

connector in the car’s 12V socket.

Remove the cap from the valve of

repaired tyre, disconnect and pull out

the black inflation tube 1 fig. 191,

connect and block it with the stack to

the valve. Inspect the pressure gauge

2 to check the tyre pressure fig. 189;

if the pressure indicated is lower than

1.8 bar / 26 psi, the TYRE IS TOO

DAMAGED AND CANNOT BE

REPAIRED. Remove and place the kit in

the specific compartment and contact a

Fiat Dealership;

if the pressure indicated is equal to or

higher than 1.8 bar / 26 psi, switch on

the compressor and reach the required

pressure. Disconnect and replace the

kit in the specific compartment.

Carefully drive and reach the Fiat

Dealership as soon as possible;

PRESSURE RESTORING

The compressor can also be used to

check and, if necessary, restore the tyre

pressure.

Disconnect and pull out the black

inflation tube 1, connect and block it

with the stalk to the tyre valve fig. 191.

With the same procedure it is possible

to inflate bicycle tyres and balloons.

The kit should be used by adults and

cannot be used by children.

CARTRIDGE

REPLACEMENT

Only use Fix&Go original cartridges

which can be purchased at Fiat

Dealership.

To remove the cartridge 1, disengage

the coupling of the black inflation tube

2, rotate the cartridge 1 anticlockwise

and then lift it; insert the new cartridge,

189

08056J0005EM

190

08056J0002EM

191

08056J0006EM

154

IN AN EMERGENCY

rotate it clockwise to end of travel

position, insert the coupling of the black

inflation tube 2 blocking it with the stalk

and then rewind the transparent tube in

the compressor site fig. 192.

WARNING

143) The information required by the

applicable regulation is indicated on the

Fix&Go kit package label. Compliance with

the indications on the label is an essential

condition to ensure the safety and the

effectiveness of the Fix&Go kit. Carefully

read the label before use, avoid improper

use. Fix&Go is subject to expiration and

must be replaced periodically. The kit

should be used by adults and cannot be

used by children.

IMPORTANT

60) Show the package and the label to the

personnel charged with handling the tyre

treated with the tyre repair kit.

61) Fix&Go provides a temporary repair,

therefore the tyre must be examined and

repaired by a specialist as soon as

possible. The sealing fluid is effective at

temperatures between -40°C and +50°C. It

is possible to repair tyres which have been

damaged on tread up to a diameter of

4mm; however, tyres damaged on their

side cannot be repaired. Before using

Fix&Go kit, ensure that the tyre isn't

excessively damaged and that the rim is in

good condition, otherwise do not use it and

contact a Fiat Dealership. Do not remove

foreign bodies from the tyre. Do not let the

compressor turned on for more than

20 consecutive minutes - overheating

hazard.

JUMP STARTING

144) 145) 146) 147)

62)

If the battery is flat, a jump starting can

be performed using the battery and the

cables of another vehicle, or using an

auxiliary battery. In all cases, the battery

used must have a capacity equal to or

a little higher than the flat one.

Jump starting may be dangerous if

carried out incorrectly: carefully follow

the procedures described below.

JUMP STARTING

IMPORTANT NOTES

Do not use an auxiliary battery or any

other source of external supply with a

voltage above 12 V: the battery, the

starter, the alternator and the electrical

system of the vehicle could be

damaged.

Do not attempt jump starting if the

battery is frozen. The battery could

break and explode!

When jump starting, never connect the

negative lead (–) of the auxiliary battery

to the negative pole 1 fig. 193 of the car

battery, but rather to an engine/gearbox

earth point.

192

08056J0007EM

155

63)

Proceed as follows to carry out a jump

starting

connect one end of the cable used

for positive (+) to the positive terminal

(+) of the vehicle with flat battery;

connect the other end of the cable

used for positive (+) to the positive

terminal (+) of the auxiliary battery;

connect one end of the cable used

for negative (–) to the negative terminal

(–) of the auxiliary battery;

connect the other end of the cable

used for negative (–) to an engine earth

(a visible metal part of the engine or

gearbox/transmission of the vehicle

with flat battery) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system;

start the vehicle engine with the

auxiliary battery, let it run for a few

minutes at idling. Start the engine of the

vehicle with flat battery.

Once the engine has started, remove

the leads, reversing the order above.

If after a few attempts the engine does

not start, do not persist but contact a

Fiat Dealership.

BUMP STARTING

Never bump start the engine by

pushing, towing or coasting downhill.

WARNING

144) Before opening the bonnet, make

sure that the engine is off and that the

ignition key is in the STOP position. Follow

the indications on the plate underneath the

bonnet. We recommend that you remove

the key from the ignition if other people

remain in the vehicle. The vehicle should

always be left after the key has been

removed or turned to the STOP position.

During refuelling, make sure that the engine

is off (and that the ignition key is in the

STOP position).

145) Do not get too close to the radiator

cooling fan: the electric fan may start;

danger of injury. Scarves, ties and other

loose clothing might be pulled by moving

parts.

146) Remove any metal objects (e.g. rings,

watches, bracelets), that might cause an

accidental electrical contact and cause

serious injury.

147) The batteries contain acid that can

burn skin or eyes. Batteries produce

hydrogen, which is easily flammable and

explosive. Therefore, keep away flames or

devices which may cause sparks.

IMPORTANT

62) Never use a fast battery-charger to

start the engine as this could damage the

electronic systems of your vehicle,

particularly the ignition and engine fuel

supply control units.

193

08066J0001EM

194

08066J0003EM

156

IN AN EMERGENCY

63) Do not connect the cable to the

negative terminal (–) of the flat battery. The

following spark could lead to battery

explosion and cause serious harm. Only

use the specific earth point; do not use any

other exposed metallic part.

FUEL CUT-OFF

SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION

Diesel and petrol versions

This intervenes in the case of an impact

causing:

the interruption of the fuel supply

with the engine consequently switching

off;

the automatic unlocking of the

doors;

turning on of the lights inside the

vehicle;

deactivation of climate control

system ventilation;

switching on of the hazard warning

lights (to deactivate the lights press the

button on the dashboard).

On some versions, the intervention of

the system is indicated by a message

shown on the display. In the same way,

a dedicated message on the display

warns the driver if system operation is

compromised.

IMPORTANT Carefully check the vehicle

for fuel leaks, for instance in the engine

compartment, under the vehicle or near

the tank area. After a collision, bring the

ignition device to STOP to prevent the

battery from running down.

LPG versions

On LPG versions, in addition to the

above, the fuel cut-off system stops

petrol supply immediately, closes the

LPG safety solenoid valve and stops

injection, consequently shutting off the

engine.

157

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM RESET

To restore correct operation of the vehicle, carry out the following procedure (this procedure must be started and completed

within less than 1 minute):

148)

Operations to be carried out Display

With direction indicator lever in neutral position, bring the ignition

device to STOP

Bring the ignition device to MAR Right direction indicator flashing

Activate the right direction indicator Left direction indicator flashing; right direction indicator on constantly

Activate the left direction indicator Right direction indicator flashing; left direction indicator on constantly

Activate the right direction indicator Left direction indicator flashing; right direction indicator on constantly

Activate the left direction indicator Both direction indicators stay on constantly

Deactivate the left direction indicator Both direction indicators switch off

Bring the ignition device to STOP

Bring the ignition device to MAR The system has been reset and the engine can be restarted

WARNING

148) If, after an impact, you smell fuel or notice leaks from the fuel system, do not reactivate the system to avoid the risk of fire.

158

IN AN EMERGENCY

TOWING THE

VEHICLE

ATTACHING THE TOW

RING

149) 150) 151)

The tow hook provided is located in the

tool box inside the luggage

compartment.

Front

Proceed as follows:

release and remove the protective

plug;

take tow hook 1 fig. 196 and screw it

fully onto the front threaded pin.

Rear

Proceed as follows:

release and remove the protective

plug;

take tow hook 1 fig. 196 and screw it

fully onto the rear threaded pin.

WARNING

149) Before towing, turn the key to MAR

and then to STOP without extracting it. The

steering column will automatically lock

when the key is removed and the wheels

cannot be steered. Also check that the

transmission is in neutral.

150) The brake servo and the

electromechanical power steering will not

work while the vehicle is being towed. You

will therefore need to apply more force on

the brake pedal and steering wheel. Do not

use flexible ropes when towing, and avoid

jerky movements. During towing, make

sure that the trailer hitch does not damage

any components it is touching. When

towing the car, you must comply with all

specific traffic regulations and adopt an

appropriate driving behaviour. Do not start

the engine while towing the car. Before

tightening the ring, clean the threaded

housing thoroughly. Make sure that the ring

is fully screwed into the housing before

towing the car.

151) The front and rear tow hooks should

be used only for emergencies on the road.

You are allowed to tow the vehicle for short

distances using an appropriate device in

accordance with the highway code (a rigid

bar), to move the vehicle on the road in

readiness for towing or transporting via a

breakdown vehicle. Tow rings MUST NOT

be used to tow vehicles off the road or

where there are obstacles and/or for

towing operations using cables or other

non-rigid devices. In compliance with the

above conditions, towing must take place

with the two vehicles (one towing, the other

towed) aligned as much as possible along

the same centre line.

195

08116J0001EM

196

P1030149-000-000

159

SERVICING AND CARE

Correct servicing permits the

performance of the vehicle to be

maintained over time, as well as limited

running costs and safeguarding the

efficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING.......161

ENGINE COMPARTMENT ......170

BATTERY RECHARGING .......177

SERVICING PROCEDURES .....178

LIFTING THE VEHICLE.........182

WHEELS AND TYRES .........182

BODY ...................183

INTERIOR .................185

160

SERVICING AND CARE

SCHEDULED

SERVICING

Correct servicing is crucial for

guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle

under the best conditions.

For this reason, Fiat has planned a

series of checks and services at fixed

distance intervals and, for

versions/markets, where provided, at

fixed time intervals, as described in the

Scheduled Servicing Plan.

Regardless of the above, it is always

necessary to carefully follow the

instructions in the Scheduled Servicing

Plan (e.g. periodically check level of

liquids, tyre pressure, etc.).

Scheduled Servicing is offered by all

Fiat Dealerships according to fixed time

or kilometres/miles intervals. If, during

each operation, in addition to the ones

scheduled, the need arises for further

replacements or repairs, these may be

carried out with the owner's explicit

agreement only. If your vehicle is used

frequently for towing, the interval

between one service operation and the

next should be reduced.

IMPORTANT NOTES

Scheduled Servicing interventions are

set out by the Manufacturer. Failure to

comply with the schedule may

invalidate the warranty.

It is advisable to inform a Fiat

Dealership of any small operating

irregularities without waiting for the next

service.

161

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN (petrol versions — LPG versions)

The checks listed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan, after reaching 120,000 km/8 years, must be cyclically repeated starting from

the first interval, thus following the same intervals as before.

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary. Check quick tyre repair kit recharge

conditions/expiry date (if provided)

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger

compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel

warning lights, etc.)

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1)

Visually inspect condition of: LPG pipes and connectors,

LPG tank fixing (1.4 T-Jet 120 HP LPG versions)

Check exhaust emissions/smokiness

Use the diagnosis socket to check engine management

system operation; emissions and (where provided) engine

oil deterioration

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel

system, brakes), rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves,

bushes, etc.)

(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.

162

SERVICING AND CARE

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Check windscreen and rear window wiper blade

position/wear

Check operation of windscreen washer system and adjust

jets if necessary

Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment

locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;

Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front and rear disc

brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator

Visually inspect conditions of toothed timing drive belt

Visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belt(s)

Check tension of accessory drive belt (for versions without

automatic tensioner)

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (2) (o) (●)

Replace spark plugs (1.4 16V 95 HP versions)

(2) If the vehicle's annual mileage is less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and filter must be replaced every year.

(o) Recommended operations

(●) Mandatory operations

163

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Spark plugs replacement (1.4 T-jet 120 HP versions /

1.4 T-Jet 120hp LPG versions) (3)

Replace the toothed timing drive belt

(4)

Replace accessory drive belt/s

(4)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (5)

Change the brake fluid

(6)

Replace filter inside the pressure regulator (1.4 T-Jet

120 HP LPG versions)

Replace paper filter (LPG in gaseous state) (1.4 T-Jet

120 HP LPG versions)

(3)For T-Jet versions, in order to guarantee correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine, it is essential to observe the following:

only use spark plugs specifically certified for these engines; all spark plugs should be of the same type and brand (see the “Engine”

paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" section); strictly comply with the replacement intervals in the Scheduled Servicing Plan; you are

advised to contact a Dealership to have the plugs replaced.

(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 120,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance

travelled. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the car (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage

60,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 4 years, regardless of distance travelled.

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, you are advised to change this filter every 15,000 km.

(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.

164

SERVICING AND CARE

Thousands of miles

9 182736455463728190

Thousands of kilometres

15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150

Years

12345678910

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) (o) (●)

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, you are advised to change this filter every 15,000 km.

(o) Recommended operations

(●) Mandatory operations

165

SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN (Diesel versions)

The checks listed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan, after reaching 120,000 km/6 years, must be cyclically repeated starting from

the first interval, thus following the same intervals as before.

Thousands of miles

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years

12345678910

Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if

necessary. Check quick tyre repair kit recharge

conditions/expiry date (if provided)

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction

indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger

compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel

warning lights, etc.)

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1)

Check exhaust emissions/smokiness

Use the diagnosis socket to check engine management

system operation; emissions and (if present) engine oil

deterioration

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork,

underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel

system, brakes), rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves,

bushes, etc.)

Check windscreen and rear window wiper blade

position/wear

(1) Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damaged.

166

SERVICING AND CARE

Thousands of miles

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years

12345678910

Check operation of windscreen washer system and adjust

jets if necessary

Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment

locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;

Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front and rear disc

brake pads and integrity of pad wear indicator

Visually inspect condition of toothed timing drive belt

(1.6 120 HP Multijet versions)

Visually inspect condition of the accessory drive belt(s)

Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without

automatic tensioner)

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (versions with DPF)

(2)

Replace toothed timing drive belt (1.6 120 HP MultiJet

versions)

(3)

(2) The actual interval for changing the oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the

warning light or message (if present) in the instrument panel In any case, it must never exceed 2 years. If the vehicle is mainly used in towns

and cities, change the engine oil and filter every year.

(3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 120,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance

travelled. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the car (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage

60,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 4 years, regardless of distance travelled.

167

Thousands of miles

12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120

Thousands of kilometres

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Years

12345678910

Replace accessory drive belt/s

(3)

Replace fuel filter cartridge (1.3 MultiJet 95 HP versions)

(4)

Replace fuel filter cartridge (1.6 MultiJet 120 HP versions)

(4)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (5)

Change the brake fluid

(6)

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) (o) (●)

(3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 120,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance

travelled. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the car (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage

60,000 km. The belt must be replaced every 4 years, regardless of distance travelled.

(4) If the vehicle runs on fuel with quality below the relevant European specification, this filter must be replaced every 20,000 km

(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage.

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 20,000 km.

(o) Recommended operations

(●) Mandatory operations

168

SERVICING AND CARE

PERIODIC CHECKS

Every 1,000 km or before long trips

check and, if necessary, top up:

engine coolant level;

brake fluid level;

windscreen washer fluid level;

tyre inflation pressure and condition;

operation of lighting system

(headlights, direction indicators, hazard

warning lights, etc.);

operation of screen washing/wiping

system and positioning/wear of wiper

blades.

Every 3,000 km, check and top up if

required: engine oil level.

DEMANDING USE OF THE

CAR

If the vehicle is used mainly under one

of the following conditions:

dusty roads;

short, repeated journeys (less than

7-8 km) at sub-zero outside

temperatures;

engine often idling or driving long

distances at low speeds or long periods

of inactivity;

the following checks must be carried

out more often than indicated in the

Scheduled Servicing Plan:

check front disc brake pad condition

and wear;

check cleanliness of bonnet and

luggage compartment locks,

cleanliness and lubrication of linkage;

visually inspect conditions of: engine,

gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses

(exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and

rubber elements (gaiters/sleeves/

bushes, etc.);

check battery charge and battery

fluid level (electrolyte);

visually inspect conditions of the

accessory drive belts;

check and, if necessary, change

engine oil and replace oil filter;

check and, if necessary, replace

pollen filter;

check and, if necessary, replace air

cleaner.

169

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CHECKING LEVELS

152) 153)

64)

1.4 16V 95 HP version

1. Brake fluid 2. Battery 3. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid 4. Engine coolant fluid 5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine oil cap/filler

197

09026J0001EM

170

SERVICING AND CARE

1.4 T-Jet 120 HP version

1. Brake fluid 2. Battery 3. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid 4. Engine coolant fluid 5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine

oil cap/filler

198

P1030198-000-000

171

1.4 T-Jet 120hp LPG version

1. Brake fluid 2. Battery 3. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid 4. Engine coolant fluid 5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine

oil cap/filler

199

PGL000021

172

SERVICING AND CARE

Version 1.6 16V Multijet 120hp / 1.6 16V Multijet 120hp ECO

1. Brake fluid 2. Battery 3. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid 4. Engine coolant fluid 5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Engine oil cap/filler

200

09026J0003EM

173

1.3 Multijet 95 HP version

1. Brake fluid 2. Battery 3. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid 4. Engine coolant fluid 5. Engine oil

dipstick

6. Engine oil cap/filler

201

09026J0002EM

174

SERVICING AND CARE

ENGINE OIL

154)

65)

Check the oil level a few minutes (about

5) after the engine has stopped, with

the vehicle parked on level ground.

Check that the oil level is between the

MIN and MAX references on the

dipstick.

If the level of the oil is close to or below

the MIN mark, add oil via the filler fitting

until the MAX mark is reached.

Take out the engine oil dipstick, clean it

with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it.

Extract it again and check that the level

is between the MIN and MAX marks on

the dipstick.

Engine oil consumption

66)

The maximum engine oil consumption

is usually 400 grams every 1000 km.

When the car is new, the engine needs

to be run in; therefore the engine oil

consumption can only be considered

stabilised after the first 5000 - 6000 km.

IMPORTANT After adding or changing

the oil, let the engine turn over for a few

seconds and wait a few minutes after

turning it off before you check the level.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID

155)

67)

If the level is too low, unscrew the cap

of reservoir 4 and add the fluid

described in the "Technical

Specifications" chapter.

WINDSCREEN / REAR

WINDOW WASHING FLUID

156) 157)

If the level is too low, raise the reservoir

cap 3 and add the fluid described in the

"Technical Specifications" chapter.

BRAKE FLUID

158) 159)

68)

Check that the fluid is at the max. level.

If the fluid level in the reservoir is too

low, undo the reservoir cap 1 and add

the fluid described in the "Technical

Specifications" chapter.

IMPORTANT Carefully clean the cap of

the reservoir and the surrounding

surface. Take great care to ensure that

impurities do not enter the reservoir

when the cap is opened.

For topping-up, always use a funnel

with integrated filter with mesh equal to

or lower than 0.12 mm.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid is hygroscopic

(i.e. it absorbs moisture). For this

reason, if the vehicle is mainly used in

areas with a high degree of

atmospheric humidity, the fluid should

be replaced at more frequent intervals

than specified in the "Scheduled

Servicing Plan".

BATTERY

160) 161) 162)

68)

The battery does not require the

electrolyte to be topped up with distilled

water.

A periodic check carried out at a Fiat

Dealership is, however, necessary to

check efficiency.

Replacing the battery

If necessary, replace the battery with

another original battery with the same

specifications. Follow the battery

Manufacturer’s instructions for

maintenance.

175

USEFUL ADVICE FOR

EXTENDING THE LIFE OF

YOUR BATTERY

Useful advice for extending the life

of your battery

To avoid draining your battery and

make it last longer, observe the

following instructions:

when you park the car, ensure that

the doors, tailgate and bonnet are

closed properly, to prevent any lights

from remaining on inside the

passenger's compartment;

switch off all roof lights inside the car:

the car is however equipped with a

system which switches all internal lights

off automatically;

do not keep accessories (e.g. radio,

hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on

for a long time when the engine is not

running;

before performing any operation on

the electrical system, disconnect the

negative battery cable.

If, after purchasing the vehicle, you wish

to install electrical accessories which

require permanent electrical supply (e.g.

alarm, etc.) or accessories which

influence the electrical supply

requirements, contact a Fiat Dealership,

whose qualified staff will evaluate the

overall electrical consumption.

70)

IMPORTANT After the battery is

disconnected, the steering must be

initialised. The

warning light on the

instrument panel (or symbol on the

display) switches on to indicate this. To

carry out this procedure, simply turn the

steering wheel all the way from one end

to the other or drive in a straight line for

about a hundred metres.

IMPORTANT If the charge level remains

under 50% for a long time, the battery

is damaged by sulphation, reducing its

capacity and efficiency at start-up. The

battery is also more prone to the risk of

freezing (at temperatures as high as

-10°C). Refer to the "Vehicle inactivity"

paragraph in "Starting and driving"

chapter if the vehicle is left parked for a

long time.

WARNING

152) Never smoke while working in the

engine compartment: gas and inflammable

vapours may be present, with the risk of

fire.

153) Be very careful when working in the

engine compartment when the engine is

hot: you may get burned. Do not get too

close to the radiator cooling fan: the

electric fan may start; danger of injury.

Scarves, ties and other loose clothing

might be pulled by moving parts.

154) If the engine oil is being topped up,

wait for the engine to cool down before

loosening the filler cap, particularly for

vehicles with aluminium cap (where

provided). WARNING: risk of burns!

155) The cooling system is pressurised. If

the cap needs replacing, do so with

another original or the effectiveness of the

system may be compromised. Do not

remove the reservoir plug when the engine

is hot: you risk scalding yourself.

156) Do not travel if the windscreen

washer reservoir is empty: using the

windscreen washer is essential for

improving visibility. Repeated operation of

the system without fluid could damage or

cause rapid deterioration of some system

components.

157) Some commercial additives for

windscreen washer fluid are flammable.

The engine compartment contains hot

components which may start a fire.

158) Brake fluid is poisonous and highly

corrosive. In the event of accidental

contact, immediately wash the affected

parts with water and mild soap. Then rinse

thoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if

swallowed.

159) The symbol

, on the brake fluid

container indicates if a brake fluid is

synthetic or mineral-based. Use of mineral

type fluids will damage the special rubber

seals of the braking system beyond repair.

160) Battery fluid is poisonous and

corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin and

eyes. Keep open flames away from the

battery and do not use objects that might

create sparks: risk of explosion and fire.

161) Using the battery with insufficient fluid

irreparably damages the battery and may

cause an explosion.

176

SERVICING AND CARE

162) When performing any operation on

the battery or near it, always protect your

eyes with special goggles.

IMPORTANT

64) Be careful not to confuse the various

types of fluids while topping up: they are

not compatible with each other! Topping up

with an unsuitable fluid could severely

damage your vehicle.

65) The oil level must never exceed the

MAX. mark.

66) Always top up using engine oil of the

same specifications as that already in the

engine.

67) PARAFLU

anti-freeze is used in the

engine cooling system. Use fluid of the

same type as that contained in the cooling

system for any top-ups. PARAFLU

cannot be mixed with any other type of

fluid. If this happens, do not start the

engine under any circumstances and

contact a Fiat Dealership.

68) Prevent brake fluid, which is highly

corrosive, from coming into contact with

painted parts. Should it happen,

immediately wash with water.

69) If the vehicle must remain unused for a

long time at a very low temperature,

remove the battery and take it to a warm

place, to avoid freezing.

70) Incorrect installation of electric and

electronic devices may cause severe

damage to your car. After purchasing your

vehicle, if you wish to install any

accessories (e.g. anti-theft, radio phone,

etc.), go to a Fiat Dealership, which will

suggest the most suitable devices and

advise you whether a higher capacity

battery needs to be installed.

IMPORTANT

3) The used engine oil and the filter that has

been replaced contain substances that are

harmful to the environment. To change the

oil and filters, we advise you to contact a

Fiat Dealership.

4) Batteries contain substances which are

very dangerous for the environment. For

battery replacement, contact a Fiat

Dealership.

BATTERY

RECHARGING

IMPORTANT NOTES

IMPORTANT The battery recharging

procedure is given as information only.

To carry out this operation contact a

Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT After setting the ignition

device to STOP and having closed the

driver side door, wait at least one

minute before disconnecting the

electrical supply from the battery. When

reconnecting the electrical supply to the

battery, make sure that the ignition

device is in the STOP position and the

driver side door is closed.

IMPORTANT Charging should be slow

at a low ampere rating for

approximately 24 hours. Charging for a

longer time may damage the battery.

IMPORTANT The cables of the

electrical system must be correctly

reconnected to the battery, i.e. the

positive cable (+) to the positive

terminal and the negative cable (–) to

the negative terminal. The battery

terminals are marked with the positive

(+) and negative (–) symbols, and are

shown on the battery cover. The battery

terminals must also be corrosion-free

and firmly secured to the terminals. If a

177

"quick-type" battery charger is used

with the battery fitted on the vehicle,

before connecting it disconnect both

cables of the battery itself. Do not use a

"quick-type" battery charger to provide

the starting voltage.

VERSIONS WITHOUT

STOP/START SYSTEM

To recharge, proceed as follows:

disconnect the terminal from the

negative battery pole;

connect the charger cables to the

battery terminals, observing the polarity;

turn on the charger;

when it is recharged, turn the

charger off before disconnecting it from

the battery;

reconnect the terminal to the

negative battery pole.

VERSIONS WITH

STOP/START SYSTEM

(where provided)

To recharge, proceed as follows:

disconnect the connector 1

fig. 202 (pressing the button 2) from the

sensor 3 monitoring the battery

conditions, on the negative pole (–) 4 of

the battery;

connect the positive cable (+) of the

battery charger to the positive battery

terminal 5 and the negative cable (–) to

sensor terminal 4 as shown;

turn on the battery charger. At the

end of the charging process, switch the

battery charger off;

after having disconnected the

charging device, reconnect connector

1 to the sensor 3 as shown.

SERVICING

PROCEDURES

The following pages contain the rules

on the required maintenance

envisaged by the technical personnel

who designed the vehicle.

In addition to these specific

maintenance instructions specified for

routine scheduled servicing, there are

other components which may require

intervention or replacements over the

vehicle’s life cycle.

ENGINE OIL

Engine oil level check

74)

To ensure correct engine lubrication, the

oil must always be kept at the

prescribed level (see "Engine

compartment" in this chapter).

ENGINE OIL FILTER

Replacing the engine oil filter

The engine oil filter must be replaced

each time the engine oil is changed.

It is advisable to replace it with a

genuine spare part, specifically

designed for this vehicle.

202

09036J0001EM

178

SERVICING AND CARE

71) 72)

73)

AIR FILTER

163)

Replacing the air cleaner

See the "Scheduled servicing plan" for

the correct servicing intervals.

It is advisable to replace it with a

genuine spare part, specifically

designed for this vehicle.

AIR CONDITIONING

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

75) 76)

To ensure the best possible

performance, the air conditioning

system must be checked and undergo

maintenance at a Fiat Dealership at the

beginning of the summer.

WINDSCREEN / REAR

WINDOW WIPERS

164)

Periodically clean the windscreen and

rear window and rubber profile of the

windscreen/rear window wiper blades,

using a sponge or a soft cloth and a

non-abrasive detergent. This eliminates

the salt or impurities accumulated when

driving.

Prolonged operation of the windscreen

window wipers with dry glass may

cause the deterioration of the blades, in

addition to abrasion of the surface of

the glass. To eliminate the impurities on

the dry glass, always operate the

windscreen/rear window washers.

In the case of very low outdoor

temperatures (below 0 °C), ensure that

the movement of the rubber part in

contact with the glass is not

obstructed, before activating the

windscreen/rear window wiper. Use a

suitable deicing product to release it if

required.

Do not use the windscreen wipers to

remove frost or ice.

Also avoid contact of the rubber profile

of the blades with petroleum derivatives

such as engine oil, petrol, etc.

IMPORTANT The envisaged life of the

windscreen and rear window wiper

blades varies according to the usage

frequency. In any case, it is advisable to

replace the blades approximately once

a year. When the blades are worn,

noise, marks on the glass or streaks of

water may be noticed. In the presence

of these conditions, clean the wiper

blades or, if necessary, replace them.

IMPORTANT Driving with worn

windscreen/rear window wiper blades

is a serious hazard, because visibility is

reduced in bad weather.

Raising the windscreen wiper

blades ("Service position" function)

The "Service position" function allows

the driver to replace the windscreen

wiper blades more easily, protecting

them from snow.

Function activation

To activate this function disable the

windscreen wiper (ring nut 1 fig. 203 in

position ) before setting the ignition

device to STOP.

This function can only be activated

within 2 minutes of setting the ignition

device to STOP.

To activate this function, move the lever

upwards (unstable position) for at least

half a second.

Each time the function is activated

correctly, the wiper blades move to

signal the correct reception of the

command.

203

P2000063-000-000

179

The command can be repeated up to a

maximum of the three times. The fourth

repetition of the command deactivates

the function.

If, after using the function, the ignition

device is set back to MAR with the

blades in a position other than rest

position (at the base of the windscreen),

they will only return to rest position

following a command given using the

stalk (stalk upwards, into unstable

position) or when a speed of 5 km/h is

exceeded.

Function deactivation

The function is deactivated if:

2 minutes have passed since the

ignition device was set to STOP;

the ignition device is set to MAR and

the blades are in rest position;

the command for the function is

repeated four times.

Replacing the windscreen wiper

blades

Proceed as follows:

raise the wiper arm, press button 1

fig. 204 of the attachment spring and

remove the blade from the arm;

fit the new blade, inserting the tab in

the dedicated housing in the arm and

checking that it is locked;

lower the wiper arm onto the

windscreen.

IMPORTANT Do not operate the

windscreen wiper with the blades lifted

from the windscreen.

Replacing the rear window wiper

blade

Proceed as follows:

widen the two tabs as shown by the

arrows and rotate cover 1

fig. 205 outwards;

undo nut 2 and remove arm 3 from

the central pin;

correctly align the new arm;

fully tighten nut 2 and then reclose

cover 1.

Windscreen/rear window washer

The window washer nozzles are fixed

fig. 206 and fig. 207. If there is no jet of

fluid, firstly check that there is fluid in

the reservoir (see paragraph “Engine

compartment” in this chapter). Only use

the prescribed fluid; do not use only

water.

204

09046J0002EM

205

P103190A-000-000

206

09046J0003EM

180

SERVICING AND CARE

Then check that the nozzle holes are

not clogged; use a needle to unblock

them if necessary.

EXHAUST SYSTEM

165) 166)

77)

Adequate maintenance of the engine

exhaust system represents the best

protection against leaks of carbon

monoxide into the passenger

compartment.

WARNING

163) The air intake system (air cleaner,

rubber hoses, etc.) can be a protection in

the case of blowbacks from the engine. DO

NOT REMOVE this system unless you

need to carry out repair or servicing

operations. Before starting the engine,

ensure that the system has not been

removed: failure to observe this precaution

may result in serious injury.

164) Driving with worn windscreen/rear

window wiper blades is a serious hazard,

because visibility is reduced in bad

weather.

165) Exhaust emissions are very

dangerous, and may be lethal. They

contain carbon monoxide, a colourless,

odourless gas which can cause fainting

and poisoning if inhaled.

166) The exhaust system may reach high

temperatures and may cause a fire if the

vehicle is parked on flammable material.

Dry grass or leaves can also catch fire if

they come into contact with the exhaust

system. Do not park or use the vehicle in a

place in which the exhaust system might

come into contact with flammable material.

IMPORTANT

71) It is recommended to have the vehicle

serviced by a Fiat Dealership. When

carrying out normal periodic operations and

small servicing interventions personally on

the vehicle, it is recommended to use

suitable equipment, genuine spare parts

and the necessary fluids. Do not carry out

any interventions if you don't have the

necessary experience.

72) Incorrect servicing of the vehicle or

failure to carry out operations or repairs

(when necessary) may lead to more

expensive repairs, damage to other

components or have a negative impact on

the vehicle performance. Have any

malfunction inspected immediately by a Fiat

Dealership.

73) The vehicle is equipped with fluids

which are optimised or protecting its

performance and life and extending service

intervals. Do not use chemicals for washing

these components since they may damage

the engine, the gearbox or the climate

control system. This damage is not covered

by the vehicle’s warranty. If any component

needs to be washed due to malfunctioning,

use only the specific liquid for that

procedure.

74) An excessive or insufficient amount of

oil inside the base is extremely damaging to

the engine. Make sure it is always at an

adequate level.

207

P1030145-000-000

181

75) Always require the use of only

compressor coolants and lubricants

approved and suitable for the specific air

conditioning system fitted on the vehicle.

Some non-approved coolants are

flammable and may explode, with the risk

of injuries. The use of non-approved

coolants or lubricants may adversely affect

system efficiency, leading to expensive

repairs.

76) The air conditioner system contains

coolant under high pressure: to avoid

injuries to people or damage to the system,

any coolant addition or repair that requires

to disconnect the cables must be carried

out by a Fiat Dealership.

77) Vehicles equipped with catalytic

converter must be fuelled only with

unleaded petrol. Leaded petrol would

permanently damage the catalytic

converter and eliminate its ability to reduce

polluting emissions, seriously

compromising the engine performance,

which would be irreparably damaged. If the

engine does not work correctly, especially if

it starts irregularly or if there is a reduction

of its performance, immediately go to a Fiat

Dealership. Prolonged and faulty operation

of the engine may cause overheating of the

converter and, as a consequence, possible

damage to the converter and the vehicle.

LIFTING THE

VEHICLE

If the vehicle needs to be jacked up, go

to a Fiat Dealership, which is equipped

with shop jacks and jack arms.

The vehicle lifting points are marked on

the side panels with the

symbols

(see illustration in fig. 208 ).

WHEELS AND TYRES

167) 168) 169) 170) 171)

SNOW CHAINS

78)

205/55 R16 and 195/65 R15 tyres can

be fitted with 9 mm snow chains.

Important notes

The use of snow chains should be in

compliance with local regulations of

each country. In certain countries, tyres

marked with code M+S (Mud and

Snow) are considered as winter

equipment; therefore their use is

equivalent to that of the snow chains.

The snow chains may be applied only

to the front wheel tyres.

Check the tension of the snow chains

after the first few metres have been

driven.

IMPORTANT Using snow chains with

tyres with non-original dimensions may

damage the vehicle.

IMPORTANT Using different size or type

(M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between front

and rear axle may adversely affect

vehicle driveability, with the risk of losing

control of the vehicle and resulting

accidents.

208

P2000005-000-000

182

SERVICING AND CARE

WARNING

167) The road holding qualities of the car

also depend on the correct inflation

pressure of the tyres.

168) If tyre pressure is too low, it may

overheat and be severely damaged as a

result.

169) If the tyres are "unidirectional", do not

switch tyres from the right-hand side of the

vehicle to the left-hand side, and vice

versa. This type of tyres can only be

switched from the front axle to the rear axle

and vice versa, keeping them on the same

side of the vehicle.

170) Never submit alloy rims to repainting

treatments requiring the use of

temperatures exceeding 150°C. The

mechanical properties of the wheels could

be impaired.

171) Travelling with partially or completely

deflated tyres can cause safety problems

and damage the concerned tyre beyond

repair.

IMPORTANT

78) Keep your speed down when snow

chains are fitted; do not exceed 50 km/h.

Avoid potholes, do not drive over steps or

sidewalks and do not drive long distances

over roads without snow, to avoid

damaging both your vehicle and the road

surface.

BODY

PRESERVING THE

BODYWORK

Paint

79)

Touch up abrasions and scratches

immediately to prevent the formation of

rust.

Maintenance of paintwork consists of

washing the car: the frequency

depends on the conditions and

environment where the car is used. For

example, it is advisable to wash the

vehicle more often in areas with high

levels of atmospheric pollution or salted

roads.

Some parts of the vehicle may be

covered with a matt paint which, in

order to be maintained intact, requires

special care: see the instructions in the

warning at the end of this paragraph

80)

To correctly wash the vehicle, follow

these instructions:

if the vehicle is washed remove the

aerial from the roof;

if high pressure jets or cleaners are

used to wash the vehicle, keep a

distance of at least 40 cm from the

bodywork to avoid damage or

alteration. Build up of water could

cause damage to the vehicle in the long

term;

wash the bodywork using a low

pressure jet of water if possible;

wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy

solution over the bodywork, frequently

rinsing the sponge;

rinse well with water and dry with a

jet of air or a chamois leather.

Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door

frames, bonnet, headlight frames, etc.)

with special care, as water may

stagnate more easily in these areas. Do

not wash the car after it has been left in

the sun or with the bonnet hot: this may

alter the shine of the paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned

in the same way as the rest of the

vehicle.

IMPORTANT NOTES

Avoid parking under trees; the resin

dropped by trees makes the paintwork

go opaque and increases the possibility

of corrosion.

Bird droppings must be washed off

immediately and thoroughly as the acid

they contain is particularly aggressive.

183

Windows

Use specific detergents and clean

cloths to prevent scratching or altering

the transparency.

IMPORTANT Wipe the rear window

inside gently with a cloth following the

direction of the filaments to avoid

damaging the heating device.

Front headlights

Use a soft cloth soaked in water and

detergent for washing cars.

IMPORTANT Never use aromatic

substances (e.g. petrol) or ketones (e.g.

acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses

of the headlights.

IMPORTANT When cleaning with a

pressure washer, keep the water jet at

least 20 cm away from the headlights.

Engine compartment

At the end of every winter, wash the

engine compartment thoroughly, taking

care not to aim the jet of water directly

at the electronic control units or at the

windscreen wiper motors. Have this

operation performed at a specialised

workshop.

IMPORTANT The washing should take

place with the engine cold and the

ignition device in the STOP position.

After the washing operation, make sure

that the various protections (e.g. rubber

caps and guards) have not been

removed or damaged.

IMPORTANT

79) In order to preserve the aesthetic

appearance of the paint abrasive products

and/or polishes should not be used for

cleaning the vehicle.

80) Avoid washing with rollers and/or

brushes in washing stations. Wash the

vehicle only by hand using neutral pH

detergents; dry it with a wet chamois

leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes

should not be used for cleaning the car.

Bird droppings must be washed off

immediately and thoroughly as the acid

they contain is particularly aggressive.

Avoid (if at all possible) parking the vehicle

under trees; remove vegetable resins

immediately as, when dried, it may only be

possible to remove them with abrasive

products and/or polishes, which is highly

inadvisable as they could alter the typical

opaqueness of the paint. Do not use pure

windscreen washer fluid for cleaning the

front windscreen and rear window; dilute it

min. 50% with water. Only use pure screen

washer fluid when strictly necessary due to

outside temperature conditions.

IMPORTANT

5) Detergents pollute the environment. Only

wash your vehicle in areas equipped to

collect and treat wastewater from this type

of activity.

184

SERVICING AND CARE

INTERIOR

172) 173) 174)

Periodically check the cleanliness of the

interior, beneath the mats, which could

cause oxidation of the sheet metal.

SEATS AND FABRIC

PARTS

Remove dust with a soft brush or a

vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a

moist brush on when cleaning

non-fabric upholstery. Rub the seats

with a sponge moistened with a

solution of water and neutral detergent.

LEATHER SEATS

(where provided)

Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or

slightly damp cloth, without exerting too

much pressure.

Remove any liquid or grease stains

using an absorbent dry cloth, without

rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth or

buckskin cloth dampened with water

and mild soap. If the stain persists, use

specific products and observe the

instructions carefully.

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Make

sure that the cleaning products used

contain no alcohol or alcohol

derivatives, even in small quantities.

PLASTIC AND COATED

PARTS

81)

Clean interior plastic parts with a damp

cloth (if possible made from microfibre),

and a solution of water and neutral,

non-abrasive detergent.

To clean oily or persistent stains, use

specific products free from solvents and

designed to maintain the original

appearance and colour of the

components.

Remove any dust using a microfibre

cloth, if necessary moistened with

water. The use of paper tissues is not

recommended as these may leave

residues.

GENUINE LEATHER

PARTS

(where provided)

Use only water and mild soap to clean

these parts. Never use alcohol or

alcohol-based products.

Before using a specific product for

cleaning interiors, make sure that it

does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol

based substances.

WARNING

172) Never use flammable products, such

as petrol ether or rectified petrol to clean

the inside of the car. The electrostatic

charges which are generated by rubbing

during the cleaning operation may cause a

fire.

173) Do not keep aerosol cans in the car:

they might explode. Aerosol cans must not

be exposed to a temperature exceeding

50°C. When the vehicle is exposed to

sunlight, the internal temperature can

greatly exceed this value.

174) There must be no obstacles on the

floor underneath the pedals; make sure

that mats are always flat and do not

interfere with the pedals.

IMPORTANT

81) Never use alcohol, petrols and

derivatives to clean the dashboard and

instrument panel lens.

185

TECHNICAL DATA

Everything you may find useful for

understanding how your vehicle is

made and works is contained in this

chapter and illustrated with data, tables

and graphics. For the enthusiasts and

the technician, but also just for those

who want to know every detail of their

vehicle.

IDENTIFICATION DATA.........187

ENGINE ..................188

WHEELS .................190

DIMENSIONS ..............195

WEIGHTS .................197

REFUELLING...............199

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS......202

PERFORMANCE ............205

FUEL CONSUMPTION.........206

CO2 EMISSIONS ............208

PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING

THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS

LIFE ....................209

186

TECHNICAL DATA

IDENTIFICATION

DATA

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

It is located on the driver's door pillar. It

can be read with the door open and

bears the following data fig. 209:

Name of manufacturer

Vehicle type-approval number

Vehicle identification number

Technically allowed max. weight with

full load

Technically allowed max. weight for

combined vehicle

Technically allowed max. weight on

axle 1

Technically allowed max. weight on

axle 2

Engine identification

Type variant version

Paintwork colour code

Smoke absorption coefficient (Diesel

versions)

Further instructions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

is stamped on the plate shown in

fig. 210, located on the front left corner

of the dashboard cover, which can be

seen from outside the vehicle, through

the windscreen.

This number is also stamped on the

passenger compartment floor, in front

of the front right seat.

To access it, slide flap 1 fig. 211 in the

direction shown by the arrow.

The marking includes:

type of vehicle;

chassis serial number.

ENGINE MARKING

It is stamped on the cylinder block and

includes the type and the engine serial

number.

209

P2000048-000-000

210

10016J0001EM

211

P2000047-000-000

187

ENGINE

175)

Versions 1.4 16V 95hp 1.4 T-jet 120hp 1.4 T-Jet LPG

Engine code 843A1000 940B7000 940B7000

Cycle Otto Otto Otto

Number and position of

cylinders

4 in line 4 in line 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72 × 84 72 × 84 72 × 84

Total displacement (cm³) 1368 1368 1368

Compression ratio 11 ± 0.2 9.8:1 9.8:1

Maximum power (EC) (kW) 70 88 88

corresponding engine speed

(rpm)

6000 5000 5000

Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 127 215 215

corresponding engine speed

(rpm)

4500 2500 2500

Spark plugs NGK DCPR7E-N-10 NGK IKR9J8 NGK IKR9J8

Fuel

Unleaded petrol with R.O.N. no

lower than 95 (EN

228 specifications)

Unleaded petrol with R.O.N. no

lower than 95 (EN

228 specifications)

LPG for motor vehicles

(EN589 Specification)

188

TECHNICAL DATA

120hp

Versions 1.3 MultiJet 95hp

1.6 Multijet 120hp / 1.6 Multijet 120hp

ECO

Engine code 55266963 55260384

Cycle Diesel Diesel

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 69.6 × 82 79.5 × 80.5

Total displacement (cm³) 1248 1598

Compression ratio 16.8 ± 0.2 16.5 ± 0.4

Maximum power (EC) (kW) 70 88

corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3750 3750

Maximum torque (EC) (Nm) 200 320

corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1500 1750

Fuel

Diesel for motor vehicles

(EN590 Specification)

Diesel for motor vehicles

(EN590 Specification)

WARNING

175) Modifications or repairs to the supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system technical specifications into

account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

189

WHEELS

SNOW TYRES

176)

Use snow tyres of the same size as the

standard tyres provided with the car.

The Fiat Dealership will be happy to

provide advice concerning the most

suitable type of tyre for the customer's

requirements.

For the type of snow tyre to be used,

inflation pressures and the

specifications of the tyres, carefully

follow the instructions given in this

chapter.

The winter features of these tyres are

reduced considerably when the tread

depth is below 4 mm. Replace them in

this case.

Due to the specific characteristics of

snow tyres, in normal weather

conditions or on long motorway

journeys, the performance of these

tyres is lower than that of standard

tyres.

Their usage should therefore be

restricted in accordance with their

type-approval; always comply with

specific local regulations relating to the

use of snow tyres.

All four tyres should be the same (brand

and track) to ensure greater safety

when driving and braking as well as a

good manoeuvrability. Remember that

you should not change the rotation

direction of the tyres.

190

TECHNICAL DATA

RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED

177)

Versions Wheels Tyres provided Winter tyres

1.4 16V 95 HP

6J X 15 H2 ET38 195/65 R15 91H —

6.5J X 16 H2 ET39 205/55 R16 91H 205/55 R16 91Q (M+S)

7J X 17 H2 ET41 225/45 R17 91V 225/45 R17 91Q (M+S)

1.4 T-jet 120 HP

6J X 15 H2 ET38 195/55 R15 91H —

6.5J X 16 H2 ET39 205/55 R16 91H 205/55 R16 91Q (M+S)

7J X 17 H2 ET41 225/45 R17 91V 225/45 R17 91Q (M+S)

1.4 T-jet 120 HP

LPG

6.5J X 16 H2 ET39 205/55R16 91H 205/55 R16 91Q (M+S)

7J X 17 H2 ET41 225/45R17 91V 225/45 R17 91Q (M+S)

1.3 Multijet

95 HP

6J X 15 H2 ET38 195/65 R15 91H —

6.5J X 16 H2 ET39 205/55 R16 91H 205/55 R16 91Q (M+S)

7J X 17 H2 ET41 225/45 R17 91V 225/45 R17 91Q (M+S)

1.6 Multijet

120 HP

6J X 15 H2 ET38 195/65 R15 91H —

6.5J X 16 H2 ET39 205/55 R16 91H 205/55 R16 91Q (M+S)

7J X 17 H2 ET41 225/45 R17 91V 225/45 R17 91Q (M+S)

1.6 Multijet

120 HP ECO

6.5J X 16 H2 ET39

205/55R16 91H Goodyear

EfficientGrip Performance

(*)

—

(*) For versions/markets, where provided. Tyres offering equivalent performance can be used as an alternative.

On versions with 195 / 65 R15 and 205 / 55 R16 tyres, use smaller snow chains with a maximum projection of 9 mm beyond

the tyre profile.

191

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

When the tires are warm, the inflation pressure should be + 0.3 bar in relation to the recommended figure. However, recheck

that the value is correct with the tyre cold.

With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

If it is necessary to raise the vehicle, refer to the "Raising the vehicle" paragraph in the "In an emergency" chapter.

192

TECHNICAL DATA

TIPO 5DOOR version

Versions Tyres

Unladen/medium load Full load

Full size

spare wheel

Space saver

spare

wheel

(**)

Front Rear Front Rear

1.4 16V

95 HP

195 / 55 R15

2.2 2.1 2.6 2.5

(*)

4.2

205 / 55 R16

225 / 45 R17

1.4 T-jet

120 HP /

1.3 Multijet

95 HP

195 / 55 R15

2.3 2.1 2.6 2.5205 / 55 R16

225 / 45 R17

1.4 T-jet

120 HP LPG

205 / 55 R16

2.3 2.1 2.6 2.5

225 / 45 R17

1.6 Multijet

120 HP

195 / 55 R15

2.4 2.1 2.6 2.5205 / 55 R16

225 / 45 R17

1.6 Multijet

120 HP ECO

205/

55R16 91H

Goodyear

EfficientGrip

Performance

(***)

2.8 2.5 2.6 2.5

(**) (where provided)

(*) If the spare wheel is used in an emergency, check pressure and, if necessary, align it to the values prescribed for the tyre of the axle where it

is used.

(***) For versions/markets, where provided. Tyres offering equivalent performance can be used as an alternative.

193

TIPO STATION WAGON version

Versions Tyres

Unladen/medium load Full load

Full size spare

wheel

Front Rear Front Rear

1.4 16V 95 HP

/ 1.3 Multijet

95 HP

195 / 65 R15

2.3 2.3

2.5 2.7

(*)

205 / 55 R16

225 / 45 R17 2.3 2.2

1.4 T-jet

120 HP /

1.4 T-jet

120 HP LPG

205 / 55 R16 2.3 2.3

225 / 45 R17 2.3 2.2

1.6 Multijet

120 HP

205 / 55 R16 2.5 2.3

225 / 45 R17 2.4 2.2

1.6 Multijet

120 HP ECO

205/55R16 91H

Goodyear

EfficientGrip

Performance

(**)

2.8 2.5

(*) If the spare wheel is used in an emergency, check pressure and, if necessary, align it to the values prescribed for the tyre of the axle where it

is used.

(**) For versions/markets, where provided. Tyres offering equivalent performance can be used as an alternative.

WARNING

176) The maximum speed for snow tyres marked “Q” is 160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for “T” tyres and 210 km/h for "H" tyres. The highway

code speed limits must however always be complied with.

177) If winter tyres with a lower speed rating than that indicated in the Registration Document are used, do not exceed the maximum speed

corresponding to the speed rating of the tyres used.

194

TECHNICAL DATA

DIMENSIONS

TIPO 5DOOR version

Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tyres. Height is measured with

vehicle unladen. Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

AB C D EFGH I

893 2638 837 4368 1495 1542 1543 2002 1792

Luggage compartment capacity: 440 litres.

212

P2000008-000-000

195

TIPO STATION WAGON version

Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tyres. Height is measured with

vehicle unladen. Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

AB C D EFGH I

893 2638 1040 4571 1512 1542 1543 2002 1792

Luggage compartment capacity: 550 litres.

213

P2000108

196

TECHNICAL DATA

WEIGHTS

Weights (kg) 1.4 16V 95 HP 1.4 T-jet 120 HP 1.4 T-jet 120 HP LPG

Unladen weight (with all fluids,

fuel tank filled to 90% and

without optional equipment)

1195 / 1205

(*) 1275 / 1305(*) 1310 / 1320(*)

Payload including the driver (**) 500 / 550(*) 500 / 550(*) 500 / 550(*)

Maximum permitted loads (***)

– front axle 1050 1050 1050

– rear axle

900 / 950

(*) 900 / 950(*) 900 / 950(*)

– total

1695 / 1755

(*) 1775 / 1855(*) 1810 / 1870(*)

Towable loads

– braked trailer 1200 1200 1200

– trailer without brakes 500 500 500

Maximum load on tow hitch

(trailer with brakes)

60 60 60

Maximum load on roof

(****) 55/75(*) 55/75(*) 55/75(*)

(*) TIPO STATION WAGON

(**) If special equipment is fitted, the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.

(***) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the

maximum permitted loads.

(****) The value shown includes the weight on the roof bars

197

Weights (kg) 1.3 MultiJet 95 HP 1.6 Multijet 120 HP

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled

to 90% and without optional equipment)

1290 / 1300

(*) 1295 / 1320(*)

Payload including the driver (**) 500 / 550(*) 500 / 550(*)

Maximum permitted loads (***)

– front axle 1050 1050

– rear axle

900 / 950

(*) 900 / 950(*)

– total

1790 / 1850

(*) 1795 / 1870(*)

Towable loads

– braked trailer 1200 1200

– trailer without brakes 500 500

Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with

brakes)

60 60

Maximum load on roof

(****) 55/75(*) 55/75(*)

(*) TIPO STATION WAGON

(**) If special equipment is fitted, the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.

(***) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the

maximum permitted loads.

(****) The value shown includes the weight on the roof bars

198

TECHNICAL DATA

REFUELLING

1.4 16V 95hp 1.4 T-jet 120hp

Prescribed fuels and original

lubricants

Fuel tank (litres) 50 50

Unleaded petrol with R.O.N. no

lower than 95 (EN

228 specifications)

(*)

including a reserve of (litres) 7 7

Engine cooling system (litres) 4.6 5.2

Mixture of distilled water and

PARAFLU

liquid at 50% (**)

Engine sump (litres) 2.8 2.8

SELENIA K P.E.

Engine sump and filter (litres) 2.95 3.4

Gearbox casing/differential

(litres)

1.76 1.8

TUTELA TRANSMISSION

GEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg) 0.74 0.74 TUTELA TOP 4/S

Windscreen washer fluid

reservoir (litres)

Mixture of water and TUTELA

PROFESSIONAL SC35

(*)The maximum engine power and the car’s performance can only be guaranteed with lead-free petrol with an R.O.N. of 95 or higher.

(**)When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU

and 40%

demineralised water.

199

1.4 T-Jet LPG Prescribed fuels and original lubricants

Fuel tank (litres)

50/42

(*)

Unleaded petrol not less than 95 RON (EN

228 specification)/LPG

(EN589 specification)

(**)

including a reserve of (litres)

7/8

(*)

Engine cooling system (litres) 5.2

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU

liquid at 50% (***)

Engine sump (litres) 2.8

SELENIA MULTIPOWER GAS 5W-40

Engine sump and filter (litres) 3.4

Gearbox casing/differential (litres) 1.8 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg) 0.74 TUTELA TOP 4/S

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir (litres) 3

Mixture of water and TUTELA

PROFESSIONAL SC35

(*) LPG Tank

(**)The maximum engine power and the car’s performance can only be guaranteed with lead-free petrol with an R.O.N. of 95 or higher.

(***)When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLU

and 40%

demineralised water.

200

TECHNICAL DATA

120hp

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP 1.6 Multijet 120 HP Prescribed fuels and original lubricants

Fuel tank (litres) 50 50

Diesel for motor vehicles (EN 590 Specification)

including a reserve of (litres) 7 7

Engine cooling system (litres) 6.1 6.1

Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU

50% (**)

Engine sump (litres) 3.7 4.4

SELENIA WR FORWARD

Engine sump and filter (litres) 3.9 4.8

Gearbox casing/differential (litres) 2.0 1.8 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARFORCE

Hydraulic brake circuit (kg) 0.74 0.74 TUTELA TOP 4/S

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

(litres)

Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL

SC35

(**) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU

and demineralised

water.

201

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of

the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission

specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to

top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

82)

PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Use Features Specification

Original fluids and

lubricants

Replacement interval

Lubricant for petrol

engines

SAE 5W-40

ACEA C3 / API SN

9.55535-S2

SELENIA K P.E.

Contractual Technical

Reference No.

F603.C07

According to Scheduled

Servicing Plan

Lubricant for diesel

engines

SAE 0W-30

ACEA C2

9.55535-DS1 or

MS.90047

SELENIA WR

FORWARD

Contractual Technical

Reference No. F842.F13

According to Scheduled

Servicing Plan

Lubricants for

petrol/LPG engines

SAE 5W-40

ACEA C3 / API SN

9.55535-T2

SELENIA

MULTIPOWER GAS

5W-40

Technical Contract

Reference No. F922.E09

According to Scheduled

Servicing Plan

202

TECHNICAL DATA

Use Features Specification

Original fluids and

lubricants

Applications

Lubricants and

greases for drive

transmission

SAE 75W grade

synthetic lubricant.

9.55550-MZ6 or

MS.90030-M1

TUTELA

TRANSMISSION

GEARFORCE

Contractual Technical

Reference No. F002.F10

Manual mechanical

gearbox

Grease for constant

velocity joints with low

friction coefficient.

N.L.G.I. consistency 0-1

9.55580 – GRASS II

TUTELA STAR 700

Contractual Technical

Reference No. F701.C07

Differential side constant

velocity joints

Molybdenum disulphide

grease, for use at high

temperatures. N.L.G.I.

consistency 1-2

9.55580-GRAS II

TUTELA ALL STAR

Contractual Technical

Reference No. F702.G07

Wheel side constant

velocity joints

203

Use Features Specification

Original fluids and

lubricants

Applications

Brake fluid

Synthetic fluid for brake

and clutch systems.

Exceeds specifications:

FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4,

ISO 4925 SAE J1704.

9.55597 or MS.90039

TUTELA TOP 4/S

Contractual Technical

Reference No. F005.F15

Hydraulic brakes and

hydraulic clutch controls

Protective agent for

radiators

Protective agent with

antifreeze action with

organic formulation.

CUNA NC 956-16,

ASTM D

3306 Specifications.

9.55523 or MS.90032

PARAFLU

(*)

Contractual Technical

Reference No.

F101.M01

Cooling circuits

proportions of use: 50%

water 50% PARAFLU

(**)

Diesel fuel additive

Additive for Diesel with

antifreeze and protective

action for Diesel engines

TUTELA DIESEL ART

Contractual Technical

Reference No. F601.L06

To mix with diesel (25 cc

per 10 litres)

Windscreen washer

fluid

Mixture of spirits and

surfactants. Exceeds

CUNA NC

956-11 specifications

9.55522 or MS.90043

TUTELA

PROFESSIONAL SC

Contractual Technical

Reference No. F201.D02

To be used diluted or

undiluted in screen

washer/wiper systems

(*) Do not top up or mix with other fluids which have different specifications from the ones described.

(**) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% PARAFLU

and 40%

demineralised water.

IMPORTANT

82) The use of products with different specifications than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine that is not covered by the

warranty.

204

TECHNICAL DATA

PERFORMANCE

Top speeds after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Versions km/h

1.4 16V 95hp 185

1.4 T-jet 120hp / 1.4 T-jet 120hp LPG 200

1.3 MultiJet 95hp 180

1.6 MultiJet 120hp 200

1.6 Multijet 120hp ECO 200

205

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures given in the table below are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by

specific European Directives.

The following procedures are used to measure the fuel consumption:

urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the vehicle;

extra-urban cycle: followed by driving simulating extra-urban use of the car with frequent accelerating in all gears, speed

varies between 0 and 120 km/h;

combined fuel consumption: calculated with a weighting of approximately 37% of the urban cycle and 63% of the

extra-urban cycle.

IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, general condition of the car, trim

level/equipment/accessories, use of the climate control system, car load, presence of roof racks and other situations that

adversely affect the aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to different fuel consumption values than those measured.

IMPORTANT The fuel consumption will get more regular only after having driven the first 3000 km.

206

TECHNICAL DATA

FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE

(litres/100 km)

Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined

1.4 16V 95 HP 7.7 4.5 5.7

1.4 T-jet 120 HP 7.7 5.0 6.0

1.4 T-jet 120 HP LPG

11.4

(**)

/ 8.2

(***) 6.5 (**)

/ 5.2

(***) 8.3 (**)

/ 6.3

(***)

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP 4.5 3.3 3.7

1.6 Multijet 120 HP 4.4 3.3 3.7

1.6 Multijet 120 HP ECO

(*)

4.0 3.0 3.4

(**) Running on LPG

(***) Running on Petrol

(*) If using tyre pressures or types different from the values prescribed, the indicated emission and consumption levels are not guaranteed.

207

CO2 EMISSIONS

The CO

emission levels given in the following table refer to combined consumption.

Versions

EMISSIONS

ACCORDING TO THE EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE IN FORCE

(g/km)

1.4 16V 95 HP 132

1.4 T-jet 120 HP 139

1.4 T-jet 120 HP LPG

135

(**) / 146 (***)

1.3 MultiJet 95 HP 99

1.6 Multijet 120 HP 98

1.6 Multijet 120 HP ECO

(*)

(**) Running on LPG

(***) Running on Petrol

(*) If using tyre pressures or types different from the values prescribed, the indicated emission and consumption levels are not guaranteed.

208

TECHNICAL DATA

PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS

LIFE

(for versions/markets, where provided)

FCA has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its production

processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly "eco-compatible". To grant customers the best possible service in

terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of

their life, FCA is offering its customers the chance to hand over their car at the end of its life without incurring any additional

costs. The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over, the last keeper or owner should not incur any

expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value.

To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships if you are purchasing another

vehicle or an FCA-authorised collection and scrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality

service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment.

You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an FCA dealership or by calling the

number in the Warranty Booklet or by consulting the websites of the various FCA brands.

209

MULTIMEDIA

This chapter describes the main

functions of theUconnect™ 3" Radio,

Uconnect™ 5" LIVE, Uconnect™ 5"

Nav LIVE, Uconnect™ 7" HD LIVE,

Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav LIVE

infotainment systems that can be fitted

on the vehicle.

TIPS, CONTROLS AND GENERAL

INFORMATION..............211

Uconnect 3” Radio ...........213

Uconnect 5" LIVE - Uconnect 5" Nav

LIVE ....................222

Uconnect 7" HD LIVE - Uconnect 7"

HD Nav LIVE ...............234

210

MULTIMEDIA

TIPS, CONTROLS

AND GENERAL

INFORMATION

ROAD SAFETY

Learn how to use the various system

functions before setting off.

Read the instructions for the system

carefully before setting off.

178) 179)

RECEPTION CONDITIONS

Reception conditions change

constantly while driving. Reception may

be interfered with by the presence of

mountains, buildings or bridges,

especially when you are far away from

the broadcaster.

IMPORTANT The volume may be

increased when receiving traffic

information and news.

CARE AND

MAINTENANCE

Observe the following precautions to

ensure the system is fully operational:

the display lens should not come into

contact with pointed or rigid objects

which could damage its surface; use a

soft, dry anti-static cloth to clean and

do not press.

never use alcohol, petrols and

derivatives to clean the display lens.

prevent any liquid from entering the

system: this could damage it beyond

repair.

83) 84)

ANTITHEFT PROTECTION

The system is equipped with an

anti-theft protection system based on

the exchange of information with the

electronic control unit (Body Computer)

on the vehicle.

This guarantees maximum safety and

prevents the secret code from being

entered after the power supply has

been disconnected.

If the check has a positive outcome, the

system will start to operate, whereas if

the comparison codes are not the same

or if the electronic control unit (Body

Computer) is replaced, the system will

ask the user to enter the secret code

according to the procedure described

in the paragraph below.

Entering the secret code

When the system is switched on, if the

code is requested, the display will show

"Please enter Anti-Theft Code" followed

by the screen showing a keypad to

enter the secret code.

The secret code is made up of four

digits from 0 to 9.

Uconnect™ 3" Radio:

To enter the first digit of the code,

turn the "BROWSE/ENTER" right knob

and press to confirm.

After inserting the fourth digit, move

the cursor to "OK" and press the

"BROWSE ENTER" right knob: the

system will start to operate.

Uconnect™ 5" LIVE and

Uconnect™ 5" Nav LIVE:

Use the graphic buttons on the

display to enter the code digits.

If an incorrect code is entered, the

system displays "Incorrect Code" to

notify the user of the need to enter the

correct code.

After the 3 available attempts to enter

the code, the system displays

"Incorrect Code. Radio locked. Wait for

30 minutes". After the text has

disappeared it is possible to start the

code entering procedure again.

Vehicle radio passport

This document certifies ownership of

the system. The vehicle radio passport

shows the system model, serial number

and secret code.

In case of loss of the car radio

passport, contact the Fiat Dealership,

taking an ID document and the car

ownership documents.

211

IMPORTANT Keep the vehicle radio

passport in a safe place so that you

can give the information to the relevant

authorities if the system is stolen.

IMPORTANT NOTES

Look at the screen only and when it is

necessary and safe. If you need to look

at the screen for a long time, pull over

to a safe place so as not to be

distracted while driving.

Immediately stop using the system in

the event of a fault. Otherwise the

system might be damaged. Contact a

Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to

have the system repaired.

WARNING

178) Follow the safety rules here below:

otherwise serious injuries may occur to the

occupants or the system may be

damaged.

179) If the volume is too loud this can be

dangerous. Adjust the volume so that you

can still hear background noises (e.g.

horns, ambulances, police vehicles, etc.).

IMPORTANT

83) Only clean the front panel and the

display lens with a soft, clean, dry,

anti-static cloth. Cleaning and polishing

products may damage the surface. Never

use alcohol, petrols and derivatives.

84) Do not use the display as a base for

supports with suction pads or adhesives for

external navigators or smartphones or

similar devices.

212

MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 3” Radio

CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL

214

11016J0001EM-high.jpg

213

FRONT PANEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Functions Mode

Switching on Short button press

Switching off Short button press

Volume adjustment Knob clockwise/anticlockwise turning

Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Short button press

Exit the selection/return to previous screen Short button press

BROWSE ENTER

Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station or select

previous/next track

Knob clockwise/anticlockwise turning

Confirmation of the option displayed Short button press

INFO Display mode selection (Radio, Media) Short button press

PHONE

(*)

Access to Telephone mode (or versions/markets,

where provided)

Short button press

AUDIO

(*)

Access to the sound setting and adjustment functions Short button press

MENU Access to the Infotelematic Settings/System menu Short button press

MEDIA Source selection: USB/iPod or AUX Short button press

RADIO Access to the Radio mode Short button press

1-2-3-4-5-6

Store current radio station Long button press

Stored radio station recall Short button press

A-B-C

Selection of the group of radio presets or selection of

the desired letter in each list

Short button press

Search for previous radio station or selection of

USB/iPod previous track

Short button press

Scan of lower frequencies until released/fast return of

USB/iPod track

Long button press

(*) (for versions/markets, where provided)

214

MULTIMEDIA

Button Functions Mode

Search for next radio station or selection of USB/iPod

next track

Short button press

Scan of higher frequencies until released/Fast forward

of USB/iPod track

Long button press

Shuffle of USB/iPod tracks Short button press

USB/iPod loop Short button press

215

CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL

The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier. The activation of the

function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as described in the table

below.

215

11026J0005EM

216

MULTIMEDIA

STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Key (for versions/markets

where provided)

Interaction

Acceptance of incoming call

Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold

Rejection of incoming call

Ending of call in progress

217

CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL

Buttons Interaction

Button 1 (steering wheel left side)

Upper button

Brief button press: search for next radio station or selection of USB/iPod next

track.

Long button press: scan of higher frequencies until released/fast forward of

USB/iPod track.

Central button

With each press it scrolls through sources AM, FM, USB/iPod, AUX. Only the

available sources will be selected.

Lower button

Brief button press: search for previous radio station or selection of USB/iPod next

track.

Long button press: scan of lower frequencies until released/fast forward of

USB/iPod track.

Button 2 (steering wheel right side)

Upper button

Increasing volume

Brief button press: single volume increase

Long button press: fast volume increase

Central button Activation/deactivation of Mute function

Lower button

Decreasing volume

Brief button press: single volume decrease

Long button press: fast volume decrease

218

MULTIMEDIA

SWITCHING THE SYSTEM

ON/OFF

The system is switched on/off by

pressing the

button/knob.

Turn the button/knob clockwise to

increase the radio volume or

anticlockwise to decrease it. The

electronic volume adjustment control

rotates continuously (360°) in both

directions, without stop positions.

RADIO (TUNER) MODE

The system is equipped with the

following tuners: AM, FM and DAB (for

versions/markets, where provided).

Radio mode selection

Press the RADIO button on the front

panel to activate radio mode.

Selecting a frequency band

The different tuning modes can be

selected by pressing the RADIO button

on the front panel.

Indications on display

After the desired radio station is

selected on the display, the following

information is shown (INFO mode

activated):

In the upper part: the preset station, the

time and the other active radio settings

are highlighted.

In the central part: the name of the

current station, the frequency and the

radio text information (if any) are

highlighted.

FM station list

Press the BROWSE ENTER

button/knob to display the complete list

of the FM stations that can be received.

AM/FM radio station storage

The preset stations are available in all

system modes and are selected by

touching one of the presetting buttons

1-2-3-4-5-6 on the front panel. If you

are tuned to a radio station that you

wish to store, hold down the button on

the display which corresponds to the

desired preset until an acoustic

confirmation signal is emitted.

AM/FM radio station selection

To search for the desired radio station

press the

or button or use the

wheel of the steering wheel controls, or

turn the "BROWSE ENTER" knob.

Previous/next radio station search

Briefly press the

or button:

when the button is released the

previous or the next radio station is

displayed.

Previous/next radio station fast

Hold down the

or button to

start the fast search: when the button is

released, the first tunable radio is

played.

MEDIA MODE

Interaction modes for AUX, USB/iPod

operation.

Audio source selection

To select the desired audio source

among those available: AUX o

USB/iPod, press the MEDIA button.

WARNING Some multimedia player

devices may not be compatible with the

Uconnect™ system.

Track change (next/previous)

Briefly press the

button to play the

next track or briefly press the

button to return to the beginning

of the selected track or to the beginning

of the previous track if this has been

played for less than 3 seconds.

Fast forward/rewind through tracks

Press and hold down the

button to

fast forward the selected track or keep

the

button pressed to fast rewind

the track.

Track selection (browse)

Use this function to scroll through and

select the tracks on the active device.

219

The choices available depend on the

device connected. For example, on a

USB/iPod device you can also scroll

through the list of artists, genres and

albums available on the device

depending on the information present

on the tracks using the BROWSE

ENTER button/knob.

Within each alphabetical list, the A-B-C

button on the front panel allows the

user to skip to the desired letter in the

list.

NOTE This button might be disabled for

some Apple® devices.

Press the BROWSE ENTER button to

activate this function on the source

being played. Turn the BROWSE

ENTER button/knob to select the

desired category and then press the

button/knob to confirm the selection.

Press the

button to cancel the

function.

NOTE The BROWSE ENTER button

does not allow any operation on an

AUX device.

Track information display

Press the INFO button to select the

information displayed while playing

(Artist, Album, Genre, Name, Folder, File

name). Press the

button to exit the

screen.

Shuffle

Press the

button to play the tracks

on USB/iPod in a random order. Press

again to deactivate the function.

Repeat

To listen to the track again, press the

button. Press again to deactivate

the function.

USB/iPod SOURCE

To activate the USB/iPod mode insert

the corresponding device (USB or iPod)

in the USB port present on the vehicle.

If a USB/iPod device is inserted with the

system on, this starts playing the tracks

present on the device.

IMPORTANT When connecting a device

(USB or iPod) to the USB port, make

sure that it does not obstruct the

operation of the handbrake lever.

AUX SOURCE

To activate AUX mode, insert an

appropriate device in the AUX socket

on the car (see the image in the

"USB/iPod Support" paragraph).

When a device WITH AUX output is

inserted the system starts reproducing

the AUX source connected, if it is

already being played.

Adjust the volume using the

button/knob on the front panel or

using the volume adjustment control on

the connected device.

For the "Audio source selection"

function, see the "Media mode"

chapter.

IMPORTANT NOTES

The functions of the device connected

with the AUX socket are directly

managed by the device itself: it is not

possible to change track/folder/playlist

or control playing start/end/pause with

the controls on the front panel or on the

steering wheel.

Do not leave the cable of your portable

player connected to the AUX socket

after disconnection, to avoid possible

hiss from the speakers.

IMPORTANT When connecting a device

to the AUX socket, make sure that it

does not obstruct the operation of the

handbrake lever.

PHONE MODE

(where provided)

Activate phone mode

Press the PHONE button on the front

panel to activate the Phone mode.

The available commands can be used

to:

dial the wished phone number;

display and call the contacts in the

mobile phone phonebook;

220

MULTIMEDIA

display and call contacts from the

registers of previous calls;

pair up to 8 phones to make access

and connection easier and quicker;

transfer calls from the system to the

mobile phone and vice versa and

deactivate the microphone audio for

private conversations.

The mobile phone audio is transmitted

through the vehicle’s audio system; the

system automatically mutes the radio

when the Phone function is used.

Pairing a mobile phone

To pair the mobile phone, proceed as

follows:

activate the Bluetooth® function on

the mobile phone;

press the PHONE button on the

front panel;

if no phone is paired with the system

yet, the display shows a dedicated

screen;

select "Connect Phone" to start the

pairing procedure then search for the

Uconnect™ device on the mobile

phone (if "No" is selected, the Phone

main screen is displayed);

when prompted by the mobile

phone, use the phone keypad to enter

the PIN code shown on the system

display or confirm on the mobile phone

the PIN displayed;

from the "Settings" menu you can

always pair a mobile phone by selecting

"Phone menu/Add phone", then

proceed as described above;

during the pairing stage a screen is

displayed showing the progress of the

operation.

NOTE After updating the telephone

software, it is advisable for correct

operation to remove the telephone from

the list of devices paired to the radio,

delete the previous pairing of the

system also from the available

Bluetooth device list on the telephone

and pair it again.

Making a phone call

The operations described below can

only be accessed if supported by the

mobile phone in use.

A call can be made by:

selecting "Contacts" (Phonebook

......);

selecting "Recent Calls list";

selecting "Keypad".

Dialling the phone number using

the "keypad" on the display

Enter the phone number using the

graphic keypad displayed.

Proceed as follows:

press the PHONE button on the

front panel;

select "Keypad" on the display and

use the "BROWSE/ENTER" right knob

to enter the number;

select the icon to call.

Dialling the phone number using

the mobile phone

It is possible to dial a phone number

with the mobile phone and continue

using the system (never allow yourself

to be distracted while driving).

When a phone number is dialled with

the keypad of the mobile phone, the

audio of the call is played over your

vehicle's sound system.

221

Uconnect 5" LIVE - Uconnect 5" Nav LIVE

CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL

216

11086J0002EM

222

MULTIMEDIA

FRONT PANEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Functions Mode

Switching on Short button press

Switching off Short button press

Volume adjustment Left/right rotation of knob

Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Short button press

Display on/off Short button press

Exit the selection/return to previous screen Short button press

Settings Short button press

BROWSE ENTER

Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station;

media source track change

Left/right rotation of knob

Confirmation of the option displayed;

in Radio mode, shows station list;

in Media mode, allows to scroll source contents

Short button press

APPS

Access to the additional functions (display of Time,

Compass, Outside temperature, Media, Radio and

Uconnect

™ LIVE services)

Short button press

PHONE Phone data display Short button press

TRIP (*) Access to the Trip menu Short button press

NAV (**) Access to navigation (map) Short button press

MEDIA

Support selection: USB/iPod, AUX,

Bluetooth®

Short button press

RADIO Access to the Radio mode Short button press

(*) UConnect™5” LIVE only

(**) UConnect™5” Nav LIVE only

223

CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL

The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier.

The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as

described in the table below.

217

11026J0006EM

224

MULTIMEDIA

STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Interaction

Acceptance of incoming call

Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold

A list of the last 10 calls is displayed on the instrument panel (available in versions and markets where

present)

Activation of voice recognition

Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command

Interruption of voice recognition

Rejection of incoming call

Ending of call in progress

Exit the display on the instrument panel of the last calls (only with call browsing active) (available in

versions and markets where present)

Short press (phone mode): selection of next/previous call or text message (only with call browsing

active) on the instrument panel (available in versions and markets where present)

225

CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL

Buttons Interaction

Button 1 (steering wheel left side)

Upper button

Brief button press: search for next radio station or selection of USB/iPod next

track.

Long button press: scan of higher frequencies until released/fast forward of

USB/iPod track.

Central button

With each press it scrolls through sources AM, FM, DAB, USB/iPod, AUX. Only the

available sources will be selected.

Lower button

Brief button press: search for previous radio station or selection of USB/iPod

previous track.

Long button press: scan of lower frequencies until released/fast forward of

USB/iPod track.

Button 2 (steering wheel right side)

Upper button

Increasing volume

Brief button press: single volume increase

Long button press: fast volume increase

Central button Activation/deactivation of Mute / Pause function

Lower button

Decreasing volume

Brief button press: single volume decrease

Long button press: fast volume decrease

226

MULTIMEDIA

SWITCHING THE SYSTEM

ON/OFF

The system is switched on/off by

pressing the

button/knob.

Turn the button/knob clockwise to

increase the radio volume or

anticlockwise to decrease it. The

electronic volume adjustment control

rotates continuously (360°) in both

directions, without stop positions.

RADIO MODE

To activate Radio mode press the

RADIO button on the front panel and

the following information will appear on

the display:

At the top: the list of radio stations

stored (preset) is displayed; the station

being listened to is highlighted.

In the middle: display of the name of

the current radio station and the

buttons for selecting the previous or

next radio station.

At the bottom: display of the following

buttons:

"Browse": list of the radio stations

available;

"AM/FM", "AM/DAB", "FM/DAB":

selection of the desired frequency band

(button reconfigurable according to the

band selected: AM, FM or DAB);

"Tune" : manual radio station tuning

(not available for DAB radios);

"Info": additional information on the

source being listened to;

"Audio": access to the "Audio

setting" screen.

Audio menu

To access the "Audio" menu press the

Audio" button

on the front panel or

the "Audio" graphic button located at

the bottom of the display.

The following adjustments can be

carried out using the "Audio" menu:

"Equalizer" (for versions/markets,

where provided);

"Balance/Fader" (left/right and

front/rear audio balance adjustment);

"Speed/Volume" (speed-dependent

automatic volume control);

"Loudness" (for versions/markets,

where provided);

"Auto-On Radio";

To exit the "Audio" menu, press the

/Done button.

MEDIA MODE

Press the "Source" button to select the

desired audio source among those

available: AUX, USB, iPod and

Bluetooth®.

Applications used on portable devices

may be not compatible with the

Uconnect™ system.

Track selection (Browse)

Use this function to scroll through and

select the tracks on the active device.

The choices available depend on the

device connected.

For example, on a USB/iPod device you

can also scroll through the list of artists,

genres and albums available on the

device depending on the information

present on the tracks using the

BROWSE ENTER button/knob.

Within each list, the "ABC" button

allows the user to skip to the desired

letter in the list.

NOTE This button might be disabled for

some

Apple®devices.

NOTE The BROWSE ENTER button

does not allow any operation on an

AUX device.

Press the BROWSE ENTER button to

activate this function on the source

being played.

Turn the BROWSE ENTER button/knob

to select the desired category and then

press the button/knob to confirm the

selection.

Press the

button on the front panel

to cancel the function.

Bluetooth® SOURCE

This mode is activated by pairing a

Bluetooth® device containing music

tracks with the system.

227

PAIRING A Bluetooth®

AUDIO DEVICE

To pair a Bluetooth® audio device,

proceed as follows:

activate the Bluetooth® function on

the device;

press the MEDIA button on the front

panel;

if the "Media" source is active, press

the "Source" button;

select the Bluetooth® Media

source;

press the "Add Device" button;

search for Uconnect™ on the

Bluetooth® audio device (during the

pairing stage a screen is displayed

showing the progress of the operation);

when requested by the audio device,

enter the PIN code shown on the

system display or confirm on the device

the PIN displayed;

if the pairing procedure is completed

successfully, a screen is displayed.

Answer "Yes" to the question to pair the

Bluetooth® audio device as favourite

(the device will have priority over all

other devices to be paired

subsequently). If "No" is selected, the

priority is determined according to the

order of connection. The last device

connected will have the highest priority;

an audio device can also be paired

by pressing the PHONE button on the

front panel and by selecting "Settings"

or, from the "Settings" menu, selecting

"Phone/Bluetooth".

WARNING If the

Bluetooth®

connection between mobile phone and

system is lost, consult the mobile

phone handbook.

USB/iPod SOURCE

To activate the USB/iPod mode insert

the corresponding device (USB or iPod)

in the USB port located in the central

console.

When a USB/iPod device is inserted

with the radio on, it starts to play the

tracks on the device if the “AutoPlay” is

set to ON in the “Audio” menu.

AUX SOURCE

To activate AUX mode, insert an

appropriate device in the AUX socket

on the vehicle.

When a device is inserted using the

AUX output socket the system starts

reproducing the AUX source

connected, if it is already being played.

Adjust the volume using the

button/knob on the front panel or

using the volume adjustment control on

the connected device.

IMPORTANT NOTES

The functions of the device connected

with the AUX socket are directly

managed by the device itself: it is not

possible to change track/folder/playlist

or control playing start/end/pause with

the controls on the front panel or on the

steering wheel.

Do not leave the cable of your portable

player connected to the AUX socket

after disconnection, to avoid possible

hiss from the speakers.

PHONE MODE

PHONE MODE ACTIVATION

Press the PHONE button on the front

panel to activate the Phone mode.

NOTE To consult the list of mobile

phones and supported functions, visit

the www.DriveUconnect.eu website.

Use the buttons on the display to:

dial the phone number (using the

graphic keypad on the display);

display and call the contacts in the

mobile phone phonebook;

display and call contacts from the

registers of previous calls;

pair up to 10 phones/audio devices

to make access and connection easier

and quicker;

transfer calls from the system to the

mobile phone and vice versa and

deactivate the microphone audio for

private conversations.

The mobile phone audio is transmitted

through the vehicle’s audio system; the

system automatically mutes the radio

when the Phone function is used.

228

MULTIMEDIA

PAIRING A MOBILE PHONE

IMPORTANT Carry out this operation

only with vehicle stationary and in safety

conditions; this function is deactivated

when the vehicle is moving.

The pairing procedure for a mobile

phone is described below: always

consult the handbook for the mobile

phone in any case.

To pair the mobile phone, proceed as

follows:

activate the Bluetooth® function on

the mobile phone;

press the PHONE button on the front

panel;

if no phone is paired with the system

yet, the display shows a dedicated

screen;

select "Yes" to start the pairing

procedure, then search for the

Uconnect™ device on the mobile

phone (if "No" is selected, the Phone

main screen is displayed);

when prompted by the mobile

phone, use its keypad to enter the PIN

code shown on the system display or

confirm on the mobile phone the PIN

displayed;

from the "Phone" screen you can

always pair a mobile phone by pressing

the "Settings" button: press the "Add

Device" button and proceed as

described above;

during the pairing stage a screen is

displayed showing the progress of the

operation;

when the pairing procedure is

completed successfully, a screen is

displayed: answer "Yes" to the question

to pair the mobile phone as favourite

(the mobile phone will have priority over

all other mobile phones to be paired

subsequently). If no other devices are

paired, the system will consider the first

associated device as favourite.

NOTE After updating the telephone

software, it is advisable for correct

operation to remove the telephone from

the list of devices paired to the radio,

delete the previous pairing of the

system also from the available

Bluetooth device list on the telephone

and pair it again.

MAKING A PHONE CALL

The operations described below can

only be accessed if supported by the

mobile phone in use.

For all functions available, refer to the

mobile phone owner's handbook.

A call can be made by:

selecting the icon (mobile phone

phonebook);

selecting "Recent Calls";

selecting the icon;

pressing the "Redial" button.

SMS MESSAGE READER

The system can read the messages

received by the mobile phone.

To use this function the mobile phone

must support the SMS exchange

function through

Bluetooth®.

If this function is not supported by the

phone, the corresponding

button is

deactivated (greyed out).

When a text message is received, the

display will show a screen where the

options "Listen", "Call" or "Ignore" can

be selected.

Press the

button to access the list

of SMS messages received by the

mobile phone (the list displays a

maximum of 60 messages received).

Uconnect™ LIVE

SERVICES

Press the APPS button to access the

Uconnect™LIVE apps.

The services available depend on the

car configuration and the market.

To use the Uconnect™LIVE services,

you need to download the Uconnect™

LIVE app from Google Play or Apple

Store and register using the app or on

www.DriveUconnect.eu.

First access to the vehicle

Once you have launched the

Uconnect™ LIVE App and entered

your details, to access the Uconnect™

229

LIVE services in your vehicle you have

to pair the

Bluetooth® with your

smartphone and the radio, as

described in the "Pairing a mobile

phone" chapter.

When pairing is complete, the

connected services can be accessed

by pressing the Uconnect™ LIVE icon

on the radio.

Before you can use the connected

services, complete the activation

procedure by following the instructions

that appear in the Uconnect™LIVE

app after having done the

Bluetooth®

pairing.

Settings of the Uconnect™ LIVE

services that can be managed

through the radio

In the Uconnect™ LIVE radio menu

the "Settings" section can be accessed

by pressing the

icon. In this section

the user can check the system options

and change them according to their

preferences.

System updates

If an update for the Uconnect™LIVE

system is available while the

Uconnect™LIVE services are being

used, the user will be informed with a

message on the radio screen.

Connected services that can be

accessed on the vehicle

The eco:Drive™ and my:Car apps are

developed to improve the customer's

driving experience, therefore they are

available in all markets where the

Uconnect™LIVE services can be

accessed.

If the navigation system is installed in

the radio, accessing the

Uconnect™LIVE services enables use

of the "Live" services.

eco:Drive™

The eco:Drive™ application allows you

to display your driving behaviour in real

time, in order to help you reach a more

efficient driving style as far as

consumption and emissions are

concerned.

In addition, the data can be saved on a

USB flash drive, and the data analysis

can be made on your personal

computer thanks to the eco:Drive™

desktop application, available on

www.DriveUconnect.eu.

Driving style is evaluated by means of

four indices which monitor the following

parameters: acceleration, deceleration,

gearchange, speed

Display of the eco:Drive™

Press the eco:Drive™ button to

interact with the function.

A screen will appear on the radio

showing 4 indices: Acceleration,

Deceleration, Speed and Gear. These

indices are grey until the system has

enough data to evaluate the driving

style. Once sufficient data are available,

the indices will have 5 colours

depending on the evaluation: dark

green (very good), light green, yellow,

orange and red (very bad).

In the event of extended inactivity, the

display will show the average of the

indices until that moment (the "Average

index"), then the indices will be

coloured again in real time as soon as

the vehicle is restarted.

Recording and transferring trip data

The trip data can be stored in the

system memory and transferred using a

suitably configured USB memory stick

or by Uconnect™LIVE app. This

allows you to display the history of the

collected data, showing the complete

analysis of the trip data and of your

driving style.

Further information is available at

www.DriveUconnect.eu.

my:Car

my:Car allows you to keep the "health"

of your vehicle always under control.

my:Car can detect malfunction in real

time and inform the user about the

230

MULTIMEDIA

expiry of the servicing interval. Press the

" my:Car" button to interact with the

application.

The display will show a screen with the

"care:Index" section, which provides all

the detailed information about the

status of the vehicle. Press the "Active

warnings" button to show (if present)

the details of the vehicle's faults which

caused a warning light to switch on.

SETTINGS

Press the button on the front panel

to display the main "Settings" menu.

NOTE The menu items displayed vary

according to the versions.

The menu includes the following items:

Display;

Units;

Voice commands;

Clock & Date;

Safety / Assistance;

Lights;

Doors & Locks;

Vehicle Shutdown Options;

Audio;

Phone / Bluetooth;

Configurat. SiriusXM (where

provided);

Radio Setup;

Restore settings

Safety/Assistance

(where provided)

This function can be used to carry out

the following adjustments:

"Rear View camera" (where

provided): this function can be used to

carry out the following adjustments:

- "Active Guidelines" (where provided):

permits the activation of dynamic grids

that indicate the route of the vehicle on

the display.

- "Rit. telec. - "Rear View cam.delay"

(where provided): permits a delay in the

disappearance of images from the

camera when reverse is disengaged.

"Frnt Coll. Warning" (where

provided): this function can be used to

select the Full Brake Control system

intervention mode.

The options available are:

- "Off": the system is deactivated;

- "Only warning": the system intervenes

only by providing the driver with an

acoustic warning (where provided);

- "Only active braking": the system

intervenes by activating automatic

braking (where provided);

- "Warning + active braking": the

system intervenes by providing the

driver with an acoustic warning and

activating automatic braking.

"Fwd Coll. Sensitivity" (where

provided): this function can be used to

select the "readiness" of the system to

intervene, on the basis of distance from

the obstacle.

The options available are "Near",

"Med", "Far".

"Park Assist" (where provided): this

function can be used to select the type

of warning provided by the Park Assist

system.

The options available are:

- "Sound Only": the system warns the

driver that an obstacle is present

through acoustic warnings only, via the

speakers in the vehicle.

- "Sound & Display": the system warns

the driver that an obstacle is present

through acoustic (via the speakers in

the vehicle) and visual (on the

instrument panel) warnings.

"Front Park Assist vol." (where

provided): this function can be used to

select the volume of the acoustic

warnings provided by the front Park

Assist system.

"Rear Park Assist vol." (where

provided): this function can be used to

select the volume of the acoustic

warnings provided by the rear Park

Assist system.

"Park Assist vol." (where provided):

this function can be used to select the

volume of the acoustic warnings

provided by the Park Assist system.

231

"Lane Assist Warning" (where

provided): this function can be used to

select the LaneAssist system

intervention "readiness".

"Lane Assist Strength" (where

provided): this function can be used to

select the force to apply to the steering

wheel to put the vehicle back in the

lane through the electric steering

system, in the event of Lane Assist

system intervention.

"Blind Spot Alert" (where provided):

this function can be used to select the

type of warning ("Sound Only" or

"Sound & Display") to indicate the

presence of objects in the blind spot of

the door mirror.

"Rain sensor" (where provided): this

function can be used to activate/

deactivate the automatic operation of

the wipers in the event of rain.

"Brakes" (where provided): this

function can be used to select the

following submenus:

- "Brake Service" (where provided):

allows you to activate the procedure for

carrying out braking system servicing;

- "Auto Park Brake" (where provided):

allows you to activate/deactivate the

automatic park brake engagement.

NAVIGATION

(UConnect™ 5" Nav LIVE only)

Programming a route

WARNING In the interest of safety and

to reduce distractions while you are

driving, you should always plan a route

before you start driving.

Using the destination search function, it

is possible to find and reach your

destinations in different ways: searching

for a specific address, a partial address,

a specific type of location (for example

a service station or a restaurant), a

postal code, a POI (Point Of Interest)

near your current position (for example,

a restaurant with the search type set to

"nearby"), a pair of latitude and

longitude coordinates, or by selecting a

point on the map.

Select “Search” in the Main menu and

set the search for a destination.

While entering the information, the list

displays the corresponding addresses

and POIs in two separate lists. The

corresponding address and city are

displayed in the Address list and the

POI, the type of POIs and the locations

are displayed in the Point of Interest

lists.

To plan a route towards the destination,

select the “Guide” button.

A route is planned and you are guided

to your destination, using spoken

instructions and on-screen directions.

VOICE COMMANDS

Note For languages not supported by

the system, voice commands are not

available.

To use the voice commands, press the

button on the steering wheel ("Voice"

button) and say out loud the command

you want to activate.

Global

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Help

Cancel

Repeat

Voice Prompts

Phone

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Call

Dial

Redial

Call back

Last calls

Outgoing calls

Missed calls

Incoming calls

Contacts

232

MULTIMEDIA

Show SMS

Send an SMS

Show messages

Radio

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Tune to FM "frequency"

Tune to AM "frequency"

Tune to "radio name" FM

Tune to "radio name"

Media

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Play song...

Play album…

Play artist…

Play genre…

Play playlist…

Play podcast…

Play audiobook…

Select the source...

Display...

Navigation (Uconnect™ 5" Nav LIVE

only)

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Increase zoom

Decrease zoom

2D mode

3D mode

Add this position

Drive Home

Navigate going through home

Clear route

233

Uconnect 7" HD LIVE - Uconnect 7" HD Nav LIVE

CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL

218

P2100020

234

MULTIMEDIA

FRONT PANEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Functions Mode

Ignition Short button press

Switching off Short button press

Volume adjustment Left/right rotation of knob

Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Short button press

Display on/off Short button press

Exit the selection/return to previous screen Short button press

BROWSE ENTER

Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station;

media source track change

radio station change if in tuner mode

Left/right rotation of knob

Confirmation of the option displayed;

display the list of stations if in Radio mode;

scroll the contents of the sources if in Media mode;

open the browsing list if in Radio or Media mode

Short button press

235

SUMMARY TABLE OF DISPLAY BUTTONS

Button Functions Mode

Radio Access to the Radio mode Press button

Media

Source selection: USB/iPod, AUX,

Bluetooth®

Press button

Phone Access to the Phone mode Press button

Uconnect

Access to the system functions (Audio, Media, Phone,

Radio etc)

Press button

Nav (*) Access to the navigation function Press button

Settings Access the settings menu Press button

Trip Access to the Trip menu Press button

(*) Uconnect™7" HD Nav LIVE versions only

236

MULTIMEDIA

STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS

The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier.

The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as

described in the table below.

219

11026J0006EM

237

STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Button Interaction

Acceptance of incoming call

Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold

A list of the last 10 calls is displayed on the instrument panel (available in versions and markets where

present)

Activation of voice recognition

Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command

Interruption of voice recognition

Rejection of incoming call

Ending of call in progress

Exit the display on the instrument panel of the last calls (only with call browsing active) (available in

versions and markets where present)

Short press (phone mode): selection of next/previous call or text message (only with call browsing

active) on the instrument panel (available in versions and markets where present)

238

MULTIMEDIA

CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL

Buttons Interaction

Button 1 (steering wheel left side)

Upper button

Brief button press: search for next radio station or selection of USB/iPod next

track.

Long button press: scan of higher frequencies until released/fast forward of

USB/iPod track.

Central button

With each press it scrolls through sources AM, FM, DAB, USB/iPod, AUX. Only the

available sources will be selected.

Lower button

Brief button press: search for previous radio station or selection of USB/iPod

previous track.

Long button press: scan of lower frequencies until released/fast forward of

USB/iPod track.

Button 2 (steering wheel right side)

Upper button

Increasing volume

Brief button press: single volume increase

Long button press: fast volume increase

Central button Activation/deactivation of Mute / Pause function

Lower button

Decreasing volume

Brief button press: single volume decrease

Long button press: fast volume decrease

239

SWITCHING THE SYSTEM

ON/OFF

The system is switched on/off by

pressing the

button/knob.

Turn the button/knob clockwise to

increase the radio volume or

anticlockwise to decrease it. The

electronic volume adjustment control

rotates continuously (360°) in both

directions, without stop positions.

RADIO MODE

After the desired radio station is

selected, the following information is

shown on the display:

At the top: the list of radio stations

stored (preset) is displayed; the station

being listened to is highlighted.

At the centre: the name of station

being listened too is displayed.

On the left side: the "AM", "FM",

"DAB” (for versions/markets, where

provided) buttons to select the desired

frequency band are displayed (the

button corresponding to the selected

band is highlighted);

On the right: display of the following

buttons:

"Info": additional information on the

source being listened to;

"Map": navigation map view

(Uconnect™7" HD Nav LIVE versions

only).

At the bottom: display of the following

buttons:

“Browse": list of the radio stations

available;

/ selection of the

previous/next radio station;

“Tune” : manual radio station tuning;

"Audio": access to the "Audio

settings" screen.

Audio menu

To access the "Audio" menu press the

Audio" button located at the bottom of

the display.

The following adjustments can be

carried out using the "Audio" menu:

“Balance & Fade" (left/right and

front/rear audio balance adjustment);

"Equalizer" (where provided);

“Speed Adj Volume" (speed-

dependent automatic volume control);

"Loudness" (where provided);

“AUX Volume Offset” (only active if an

AUX device is inserted);

“AutoPlay”;

"Auto-On Radio".

MEDIA MODE

Press the "Media" button to select the

desired audio source among those

available: USB/iPod,

Bluetooth®,

AUX.

IMPORTANT Applications used on

portable devices may be not

compatible with the Uconnect™

system.

After Media mode is selected, the

following information is shown on the

display:

At the top: information on the track

being played and the following graphic

buttons:

"Repeat": to repeat the track being

played;

“Shuffle": to play the tracks in

random order;

Track progress and duration.

In the middle: information on the track

being played.

On the left: display of the following

buttons:

Selected device or audio source;

"Select device": select the required

audio source.

On the right: display of the following

buttons:

"Info": additional information on the

track being played;

"Tracks": list of available tracks.

"Map": navigation map view

(Uconnect™7" HD Nav LIVE versions

only).

At the bottom: information on the

track being played and the following

graphic buttons:

“Bluetooth”: for a Bluetooth(R) audio

source, opens the list of devices;

240

MULTIMEDIA

“Browse” for a USB source, opens

browsing;

/ : select previous/next

track;

: pause track being played;

"Audio": access to the "Audio

settings" screen.

Track selection

The “Tracks” function allows you to

open a window with the list of tracks

being played.

The choices available depend on the

device connected. For example, on a

USB/iPod device you can also scroll

through the list of artists, genres and

albums available on the device

depending on the information present

on the tracks using the BROWSE

ENTER button/knob or by means of the

e graphic buttons.

Within each list, the "ABC" button

allows the user to skip to the desired

letter in the list.

NOTE This button might be disabled for

some

Apple®devices.

NOTE The BROWSE ENTER button

does not allow any operation on an

AUX device.

Bluetooth® SOURCE

This mode is activated by pairing a

Bluetooth® device containing music

tracks with the system.

PAIRING A Bluetooth®

AUDIO DEVICE

To pair a Bluetooth® audio device,

proceed as follows:

activate the Bluetooth® function on

the device;

press the “Media” button on the

display;

press the "Select device" button;

select the Bluetooth® Media

source;

press the "Add device" button;

search for Uconnect™ on the

Bluetooth® audio device (during the

pairing stage a screen is displayed

showing the progress of the operation);

when requested by the audio device,

enter the PIN code shown on the

system display or confirm on the device

the PIN displayed;

if the pairing procedure is completed

successfully, a screen is displayed.

Answer "Yes" to the question to pair the

Bluetooth® audio device as favourite

(the device will have priority over all

other devices to be paired

subsequently). If "No" is selected, the

priority is determined according to the

order of connection. The last device

connected will have the highest priority;

an audio device can also be paired

by pressing the "Phone" graphic button

on the display and by selecting

"Settings" or, from the "Settings" menu,

selecting "Phone/Bluetooth".

IMPORTANT If the Bluetooth®

connection between mobile phone and

system is lost, consult the mobile

phone handbook.

USB/iPod SOURCE

To activate the USB/iPod mode insert

the corresponding device (USB or iPod)

in the USB port located in the central

console.

When a USB/iPod device is inserted

with the radio on, it starts to play the

tracks on the device if the “AutoPlay” is

set to ON in the “Audio” menu.

The Radio may change the track being

played by modifying the name-device in

the Bluetooth settings of the telephone

(where provided), if the device is

connected via USB after the Bluetooth

connection.

AUX SOURCE

To activate AUX mode, insert an

appropriate device in the AUX socket

on the vehicle.

When a device is inserted using the

AUX output socket the system starts

reproducing the AUX source

connected, if it is already being played.

Adjust the volume using the

button/knob on the front panel or

using the volume adjustment control on

the connected device.

241

The "AUX Volume Offset" function can

be selected in “Audio” settings only

when the AUX source is active.

IMPORTANT NOTES

The functions of the device connected

with the AUX socket are directly

managed by the device itself: it is not

possible to change track/folder/playlist

or control playing start/end/pause with

the controls on the front panel or on the

steering wheel.

Do not leave the cable of your portable

player connected to the AUX socket

after disconnection, to avoid possible

hiss from the speakers.

PHONE MODE

PHONE MODE ACTIVATION

Press the “Phone” button on the display

to activate the Phone mode.

NOTE To consult the list of mobile

phones and supported functions, visit

the www.DriveUconnect.eu website.

Use the buttons on the display to:

dial the phone number (using the

graphic keypad on the display);

display and call the contacts in the

mobile phone phonebook;

display and call contacts from the

registers of previous calls;

pair up to 10 phones/audio devices

to make access and connection easier

and quicker;

transfer calls from the system to the

mobile phone and vice versa and

deactivate the microphone audio for

private conversations.

The mobile phone audio is transmitted

through the vehicle’s audio system; the

system automatically mutes the radio

when the Phone function is used.

PAIRING A MOBILE PHONE

IMPORTANT Carry out this operation

only with vehicle stationary and in safety

conditions; this function is deactivated

when the vehicle is moving.

The pairing procedure for a mobile

phone is described below: always

consult the handbook for the mobile

phone in any case.

To pair the mobile phone, proceed as

follows:

activate the Bluetooth® function on

the mobile phone;

press the “Phone” button on the

display;

if no phone is paired with the system

yet, the display shows a dedicated

screen;

access “Settings” and select “Add

device” to start the pairing procedure,

then search for the Uconnect™ device

on the mobile phone;

when prompted by the mobile

phone, use its keypad to enter the PIN

code shown on the system display or

confirm on the mobile phone the PIN

displayed;

during the pairing stage a screen is

displayed showing the progress of the

operation;

when the pairing procedure is

completed successfully, a screen is

displayed: answer "Yes" to the question

to pair the mobile phone as favourite

(the mobile phone will have priority over

all other mobile phones to be paired

subsequently). If no other devices are

paired, the system will consider the first

associated device as favourite.

NOTE After updating the phone

software, for proper operation, it is

recommended to remove the phone

from the list of devices linked to the

radio, delete the previous system

pairing also from the list of

Bluetooth®

devices on the phone and make a new

pairing.

MAKING A PHONE CALL

The operations described below can

only be accessed if supported by the

mobile phone in use. For all functions

available, refer to the mobile phone

owner's handbook.

A call can be made by:

selecting "Phonebook";

selecting "Recent";

selecting "Dial";

selecting "Redial".

242

MULTIMEDIA

FAVOURITES

You can add a number or a contact (if

already in Contacts) to the favourite list

during a call by pressing one of the five

"Empty" graphic buttons on the upper

part of the display. The favourites can

also be managed by using the

Phonebook options.

SMS MESSAGE READER

The system can read the messages

received by the mobile phone. To use

this function the mobile phone must

support the SMS exchange function

through

Bluetooth®.

If this function is not supported by the

phone, the corresponding "Text" button

is deactivated (greyed out).

When a text message is received, the

display will show a screen where the

options "Read", "View", "Call" or

"Ignore" can be selected.

Press the "Text" graphic button to

access the list of text messages

received by the mobile phone (the list

displays a maximum of 60 messages

received).

DO NOT DISTURB FUNCTION

If supported by the connected phone,

by pressing the "Do not disturb"

graphic button the user will not receive

notifications of incoming calls or text

messages. The user can reply with a

default or customised message by

means of the settings.

Uconnect™ LIVE

SERVICES

Press the Uconnect™ button to

access the Uconnect™ LIVE

applications.

The services available depend on the

car configuration and the market.

To use the Uconnect™LIVE services,

you need to download the Uconnect™

LIVE app from Google Play or Apple

Store and register using the app or on

www.DriveUconnect.eu.

First access to the vehicle

Once you have launched the

Uconnect™ LIVE App and entered

your details, to access the Uconnect™

LIVE services in your vehicle you have

to pair the

Bluetooth® with your

smartphone and the radio, as

described in the "Pairing a mobile

phone" chapter.

When pairing is complete, the

connected services can be accessed

by pressing the Uconnect™ LIVE icon

on the radio.

Before you can use the connected

services, complete the activation

procedure by following the instructions

that appear in the Uconnect™LIVE

app after having done the

Bluetooth®

pairing.

Settings of the Uconnect™ LIVE

services that can be managed

through the radio

In the Uconnect™ LIVE radio menu

the "Settings" section can be accessed

by pressing the

icon. In this section

the user can check the system options

and change them according to their

preferences.

System updates

If an update for the Uconnect™LIVE

system is available while the

Uconnect™LIVE services are being

used, the user will be informed with a

message on the radio screen.

Connected services that can be

accessed on the vehicle

The eco:Drive™ and my:Car apps are

developed to improve the customer's

driving experience, therefore they are

available in all markets where the

Uconnect™LIVE services can be

accessed.

If the navigation system is installed in

the radio, accessing the

Uconnect™LIVE services enables use

of the "Live" services.

eco:Drive™

The eco:Drive™ application allows you

to display your driving behaviour in real

time, in order to help you reach a more

efficient driving style as far as

243

consumption and emissions are

concerned.

In addition, the data can be saved on a

USB flash drive, and the data analysis

can be made on your personal

computer thanks to the eco:Drive™

desktop application, available on

www.DriveUconnect.eu.

Driving style is evaluated by means of

four indices which monitor the following

parameters: acceleration, deceleration,

gearchange, speed

Display of the eco:Drive™

Press the eco:Drive™ button to

interact with the function.

A screen will appear on the radio

showing 4 indices: Acceleration,

Deceleration, Speed and Gear. These

indices are grey until the system has

enough data to evaluate the driving

style. Once sufficient data are available,

the indices will have 5 colours

depending on the evaluation: dark

green (very good), light green, yellow,

orange and red (very bad).

In the event of extended inactivity, the

display will show the average of the

indices until that moment (the "Average

index"), then the indices will be

coloured again in real time as soon as

the vehicle is restarted.

Recording and transferring trip data

The trip data can be stored in the

system memory and transferred using a

suitably configured USB memory stick

or by Uconnect™LIVE app. This

allows you to display the history of the

collected data, showing the complete

analysis of the trip data and of your

driving style.

Further information is available at

www.DriveUconnect.eu.

my:Car

my:Car allows you to keep the "health"

of your vehicle always under control.

my:Car can detect malfunction in real

time and inform the user about the

expiry of the servicing interval. Press the

" my:Car" button to interact with the

application.

The display will show a screen with the

"care:Index" section, which provides all

the detailed information about the

status of the vehicle. Press the "Active

warnings" button to show (if present)

the details of the vehicle's faults which

caused a warning light to switch on.

SETTINGS

Press the “Settings” button on the

display to show the main “Settings”

menu.

NOTE The menu items displayed vary

according to the versions.

The menu includes the following items:

Language;

Display;

Units;

Voice commands;

Time and Date;

Safety & Driving Assistance;

Lights;

Doors and Door lock;

Vehicle Shutdown Options;

Audio;

Phone/Bluetooth®;

Radio Setup;

Restore default settings;

Clear personal data.

Safety / Driving

Assistance

(where provided)

This function can be used to carry out

the following adjustments:

“ Brake Control” (where provided):

this function can be used to select the

Brake Control system intervention

mode.

The options available are:

- "Off": the system is deactivated;

- “Warning only”: the system intervenes

by activating automatic braking;

- “Warn + Act. Brk": the system

intervenes by providing the driver with

an acoustic warning and activating

automatic braking.

" Brake Control Sensitivity" (where

244

MULTIMEDIA

provided): this function can be used to

select the "readiness" of the Brake

Control system to intervene, according

to the distance from the obstacle. The

options available are "Near", "Med",

"Far".

“Park Assist" (for versions/markets,

where provided): this function can be

used to select the type of warning

provided by the Park Assist system.

The options available are:

- “Warning Only”

- “Warning + image”

“ Front Park Assist”

The options available are: "Low",

"Medium", "High".

“ Rear Park Assist”

The options available are: "Low",

"Medium", "High".

" Rear View Camera Delay" (where

provided): permits a delay in the

disappearance of images from the

camera when reverse is disengaged.

“Active Rear View Camera

Guidelines” (where provided): activates

dynamic grids that indicate the

trajectory of the vehicle on the display.

"Rain sensor" (where provided): this

function can be used to activate/

deactivate the automatic operation of

the wipers in the event of rain.

NAVIGATION

(Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav LIVE only)

Press the "Nav" button to show the

navigation map on the display.

NOTE: The navigation system volume

can only be adjusted during navigation

when the system provides voice

indications.

Main navigation menu

In the map display or navigation view,

tap the main menu button to open the

menu fig. 220 and fig. 221:

“Search”: select this button to

search for an address, a place

or a point of interest, then plan

a route to the location.

“Current route”: select this

button to cancel or change the

planned route.

“My places”: select this button

to create a collection of useful

or favourite addresses. The

following items are always

available in "My places":

“Home” and “Recent

destinations”.

“Parking”: select this button to

search for car parks.

“Weather”: select this button to

receive weather service

information.

NOTE The “Weather” function is only

active if TomTom Services are activated.

Otherwise, the button will appear

greyed out (and the function will not be

available).

“Petrol station”: select this

button to search for service

stations.

“TomTom services”: select this

button to access the following

services (available on

subscription): “Traffic”, “Speed

cameras”, “Weather”, “Online

search”.

"Report safety camera": tap on

this button to report a new

speed camera location.

NOTE The “Report safety camera”

function is only active if TomTom

Services are activated. Otherwise, the

button will appear greyed out (and the

function will not be available).

Select this button to open the

"Settings" menu;

245

Select this graphic button to

open the "Help" menu. The

"Help" menu contains

information on Uconnect™

system, for example the map

version, the serial number of

the device and the legal

notices.

Select this button to return to

the previous screen.

Select this button to return to

the map display or navigation

view.

Select this button to deactivate

voice instructions. You will no

longer hear voice instructions

but you will still receive

information such as traffic

information and warning

sounds. Tip: you can

deactivate the warning sounds

by selecting “Settings”, then

“Sounds and warnings”.

Select this button to activate

voice instructions.

Select this button to reduce

the screen brightness and

display the map in darker

colours. When driving at night

or in unlit tunnels, watching the

screen is more comfortable

and less distracting for the

driver if the map uses darker

colours. Tip: the device will

automatically switch between

day and night view depending

on the time of day. To

deactivate this function, select

“Aspect” in the “Settings”

menu and deselect the option

"Switch to night colours" when

it is dark.

Select this button to increase

the screen brightness and

display the map in brighter

colours.

VOICE COMMANDS

Note For languages not supported by

the system, voice commands are not

available.

To use the voice commands, press the

button on the steering wheel ("Voice"

button) and say out loud the command

you want to activate.

Global

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Help

Cancel

Repeat

Voice Prompts

Phone

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

220

P2100014

221

P2100013

246

MULTIMEDIA

Call

Dial

Redial

Call back

Last calls

Outgoing calls

Missed calls

Incoming calls

Contacts

Show SMS

Send an SMS

Show messages

Radio

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Tune to FM "frequency"

Tune to AM "frequency"

Tune to "radio name" FM

Tune to "radio name"

Media

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Play song...

Play album…

Play artist…

Play genre…

Play playlist…

Play podcast…

Play audiobook…

Select the source...

Display...

Navigation (Uconnect™ 7" HD Nav

LIVE only)

The following voice commands can be

given after pressing the

button on

the steering wheel:

Increase zoom

Decrease zoom

2D mode

3D mode

Add this position

Drive Home

Navigate going through home

Clear route

247

IMPORTANT INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

WARNING

INTERIOR FITTINGS

Do not travel with the storage compartment open: it may injure the front seat occupants in the event of an accident.

The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle it carefully and make sure that children don’t use it: risk of fire and/or burns.

Do not use the ashtray as a waste paper basket: it may catch fire in contact with cigarette stubs.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

The catalytic converter and particulate filter (DPF) reach very high temperatures during operation. Therefore do not park the

vehicle on flammable materials (e.g. grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.

POWER SUPPLY

Modifications or repairs to the supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system technical

specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

WHEELS

DO NOT fit wheel hub caps when using integral hub caps fixed (with springs) to the steel rim and after sale tyres provided

with Rim Protector. Use of unsuitable tyres and wheel caps may cause sudden decrease of tyre pressure.

248

Mopar Vehicle Protection offers a series of service contracts that are designed to give all our customers the

pleasure of driving their vehicle without any hitch's and concerns.

Our product portfolio consists of a wide and flexible range of extended warranty and maintenance plans

endorsed by FCA. Each with a series of different coverage tiers, in terms of durability and mileage, built to

accommodate you’re driving needs.

Service contracts are made by experts that know every part of your vehicle, and commit themselves

to maintain it in tip top conditions. Our knowledge and passion is tailored around designing

products that promises all our drivers “worry-free driving”.

Only with Mopar Vehicle Protection you are ensured that all service operations are performed

by highly qualified and specialized technicians in authorized FCA repair facilities, using the right tools,

equipment and only original parts, all over Europe.

Check which Service Contract plans are available on your market today and choose the

Service Contract that suits your driving habits best.

Ask your local dealer for further information.

MAINTAIN YOUR VEHICLE IN

TIP TOP CONDITIONS WITH

NOTE

INDEX

ABS (system)

...............73

Active Grille Shutter ............49

Active safety systems...........73

Adaptive cruise control .........116

Airbag

Front airbags .............101

Side bags ...............105

Airbag (SRS supplementary

restraint system) ...........101

Automatic climate control system.......................31

Automatic light control ..........23

AUX source.............228 ,241

Battery

..................175

Battery recharging ............177

Bluetooth® source ........227 ,241

Bodywork (cleaning and

maintenance) .............183

Bonnet ....................33

Carrying children safely

.........88

Changing a wheel ............148

Checking levels..............170

Child protection systems ........88

Child safety device ............14

Climate control ...............29

CO2 emissions ..............208

Control buttons ..............54

Control panel and on-board

instruments ...............51

CONTROLS

Controls on the front panel . . . .222

Controls on front panel .........234

Daytime running lights (DRL)

......23

Daytime running lights (DRL) (bulb

replacement)..............136

Dimensions................195

Dipped headlights .............23

Dipped headlights (bulb

replacement)..............135

Direction indicators ............25

Display ....................54

Doors.....................14

Double load compartment (TIPO

STATION WAGON version)......38

Driving assistance systems .......76

DTC (system) ................73

Electric power steering

.........34

Electric windows..............33

Electronic Cruise Control........114

Engine ...................188

marking ................187

Engine compartment ..........170

Engine compartment (washing). . . .184

Engine oil (consumption) ........175

Engine oil (level check) .........175

ERM (system)................74

ESC (system) ................73

External lights ...............23

Fiat Code (system)

............13

Fix&Go Automatic kit ..........152

Flashing the headlights..........24

Fluids and lubricants ..........202

Front ceiling light..............26

Front fog light (bulb replacement) . .136

Front fog lights ...............24

Front panel control summary

table ...................235

Front seat electric heating ........16

Front seats (manual adjustments) . . .16

Fuel consumption ............206

Fuel cut-off system ...........157

Full Brake Control (system) .......76

Fuse boxes ................142

Fuses (replacement)...........142

GSI (Gear Shift Indicator)

........54

Hazard warning lights

.........132

Emergency braking .........132

Head restraints...............20

Headlight alignment corrector .....24

Headlights..................40

Headlights (cleaning) ..........184

Heavy-duty use of the vehicle

(scheduled servicing) ........169

HHC (system)................74

Identification data

chassis marking ...........187

engine marking ............187

identification data plate .......187

Ignition device ...............12

Important information and

recommendations ..........248

Interior lights ................26

Interiors (cleaning) ............185

ISOFIX child restraint system

(installation) ...............92

iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System) ..........80

Jump starting

..............155

Keys

.....................11

key with remote control .......11

Lifting the vehicle

............182

Light beam direction ...........40

Light bulbs

types of bulbs ............133

LPG filter...................46

LPG System functional diagram ....44

Luggage Compartment .........35

Luggage compartment

(extension) ................17

Luggage covering curtain (TIPO

STATION WAGON version)......37

Main beam headlights

..........24

Main Beam Headlights (bulb

replacement)..............135

Main menu .................55

Manual climate control ..........29

Media mode ...............240

Multi-Functional Reconfigurable

Display - Right hand drive

version ..................53

Multimedia

Uconnect™ LIVE Services .229 ,243

Number plate lights (bulb

replacement)

..............141

Occupant protection systems

.....83

Paintwork (cleaning and

maintenance)

.............183

Parking Brake...............110

Parking lights ................23

Parking sensors .............123

Parking the vehicle ...........110

Passive/active safety (LPG

system) ..................42

PBA (system) ................74

Performance (top speed)........205

Periodic checks (scheduled

servicing) ................169

Pre-tensioners ...............86

Load limiters ..............87

Prescriptions for handling the

vehicle at the end of its life .....209

Radio mode

...............240

Rain sensor .................27

Rear seats..................17

Rear view camera ............125

Rear View Camera............125

Rear view mirrors .............22

Reconfigurable Multifunction

Display ..................51

Refuelling .................199

Refuelling procedure ..........129

Emergency refuelling ........129

Refuelling the vehicle ..........128

Replacing a bulb .............132

Replacing an external bulb ......135

Rims and tyres (dimensions)......191

Roof rack/ski rack .............41

SBR (Seat Belt Reminder)

.......85

SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system.......................85

Scheduled servicing...........161

Scheduled Servicing Plan .......162

Screen wiper/washer ...........26

Smart washing function .......27

Seat belts ..................83

Seats .....................16

Servicing procedures ..........178

Side bag ..................105

Side direction indicators (bulb

replacement)..............136

Sideboards (TIPO STATION

WAGON version) ............39

Snow chains ...............182

Speed Limiter...............113

SRS (supplementary restraint

system) .................101

Starting the engine ...........109

Steering lock ................13

INDEX

Steering wheel ...............21

Steering wheel controls.........237

Stop/Start system ............111

TC (system)

................74

Technical data ..............187

Third brake light (bulb

replacement)..............140

Toolbox...................36

Towing the vehicle ............159

Towing trailers ..............127

Trip Computer ...............58

TSC (system) ................75

Tyres (inflation pressure) ........192

Uconnect 3” Radio

...........213

Uconnect 5” LIVE — Uconnect 5”

Nav LIVE ................222

Uconnect 7" HD LIVE - Uconnect

7" HD Nav LIVE ............234

Use of the Owner Handbook .......3

Using the transmission .........111

Vehicle changes/alterations

.......4

Version with LPG system ........41

Warning lights and messages

.....59

Weights ..................197

Wheels ...................190

Wheels and tyres.............182

Window bag ...............105

Windows (cleaning) ...........184

Windscreen wiper

replacing wiper blades .......180

Windscreen/rear window wiper ....26

FCA Italy S.p.A. - MOPAR - Technical Services - Service Engineering

Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Turin (Italy)

Print no. 603.99.808 - 06/2016- 1 Edition

This Owner Handbook is intended to show the vehicle's operating conditions.

For the enthusiast user who wants to have insights, curiosities and detailed information about the characteristics and functions

of the vehicle, Fiat gives the opportunity to consult a dedicated section which is available in electronic format.

ONLINE VEHICLE OWNER HANDBOOK

The following symbol is reported within the text of the Owner Handbook, next to the subjects for which details are provided.

Go to the www.mopar.eu/owner

website and access your personal area.

The “Maintenance and care” page includes all the information about your vehicle and the link to access eLUM, where you will find

all the details of the Owner Handbook.

Alternatively, to access this information, go to the Internet website at http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/

The eLUM website is free and will allow you, among many other things, to easily consult the on-board documents

of all the other vehicles of the Group.

Have a nice reading and happy motoring!

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail.

At Fiat Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us,

offering quality and professionalism for all service operations.

Fiat workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks

and practical recommendations by our experts.

With Original Parts distributed by MOPAR

, you maintain the reliability, comfort

and performance features that you bought your new car for over time.

Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our cars; we recommend them because

they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies.

For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed

by FCA for your car.

SAFETY:

BRAKING SYSTEM

ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS,

CLIMATE CONTROL MAINTENANCE

COMFORT: SUSPENSION

AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS

PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS,

INJECTORS AND BATTERIES

LINEACCESSORI

ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS

WHY CHOOSING

GENUINE PARTS

COP TIPO 5 DOORS UM SW GB.qxp_500 UM ITA 31/05/16 17:11 Pagina 2

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FCA Italy S.p.A. reserves the right to modify

the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.

Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.

OWNER HANDBOOK

TIPO 5DOOR

TIPO STATION WAGON

ENGLISH

COP TIPO 5 DOORS UM SW GB.qxp_500 UM ITA 31/05/16 17:11 Pagina 1

Fiat Tipo 5Door 2017

Product's Documents

Owner Handbook

Specifications

Fiat 2017 TIPO 5DOOR Questions and Answers

Related Products

2016 FIAT 500C

Smeg 500RDUS Beverage Center Adjustable Thermostat, Removable Holders, Two Sliding Doors and Fiat 500 Parts

Sealey VS7101 Engine Oil Funnel 4pc - BMW/Fiat/Ford/Mazda/Mercedes/Toyota/Lexus/VAG

Sealey VS2005 Diesel Injector Puller for Citroen, Peugeot, Fiat

FIAT 2023 500X sedan 2023 FIAT 500X

DRAPER 27211 Engine Timing Kit (Fiat, Citroen, Peugeot)